INSTRUCTION MANUAL - Konica Minolta Australia

Transcription

INSTRUCTION MANUAL - Konica Minolta Australia
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
7065
7065
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Before copying, read this guide.
Keep in the right hand rear pocket of the machine.
Thank you very much for your purchase of the Konica 7065.
This Manual deals with making copies, correct handling of the machine, and
precautions for safety. Please read before copying.
In order to maintain a satisfactory copying performance, please keep this
Manual readily available for reference in the right hand rear pocket of the
machine.
ENERGY STAR® Program
The ENERGY STAR Program has been established
to encourage the widespread and voluntary use of
energy-efficient technologies that reduce energy
consumption and prevent pollution. As an ENERGY
STAR Partner, Konica Corporation, Inc. has
determined that this product meets the ENERGY
STAR guidelines for energy efficiency grounding it on
the following features.
Auto Low Power
This function conserves energy by lowering the set temperature of the fixing
unit. In the standard setting, Auto Low Power operates automatically when 15
minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the copier remaining
in the ready to copy state during that time.
The time period for the Auto Low Power function can be set for 5 minutes, 10
minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, or 240
minutes. See p. 5-2 for details.
Automatic Shut-Off
This function achieves further energy conservation by partially turning OFF the
power supply, thereby reducing energy consumption to 20W or less. In the
standard setting, Automatic Shut-Off follows Auto Low Power, operating
automatically when 90 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy,
with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time.
The time period for the Automatic Shut-Off function can be set for 30 minutes,
60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes or 240 minutes. See p. 5-3 for details.
Automatic Duplex Copying
To reduce paper consumption, use this function to make double-sided (duplex)
copies, automatically.
We recommend that you utilize the Auto Low Power function, the Automatic
Shut-Off function, and the Automatic Duplex Copying function.
1
Introduction
Section 1: Introduction
Features of the Konica 7065
Copier Features
Standard Equipment
Optional Equipment
Section 1 : Introduction
Features of the Konica 7065
• AE - Automatic Exposure
Automatically adjust exposure to compensate for the original.
• Alternate Exit
When no Finisher is installed, alternately switch the horizontal and vertical orientation of
each sorted set as it outputs to the exit tray. Be sure to load both A4/B5 and A4R/B5R in
separate trays other than the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
• AMS - Automatic Magnification Selection
Automatically select an appropriate magnification ratio when Paper Size is selected
manually. In the case of the Direct Selection Screen, automatically select it when [-A-] key
is touched.
• APS - Automatic Paper Selection
Automatically select copy paper size to match the original documents.
• ATS - Automatic Tray Switching
Automatically switch tray to allow copying to be continued without interruption when the
selected tray becomes empty while copying is in progress.
• Auto Layout
The original image on the platen glass is copied and centred on a sheet.
• Auto Low Power
Automatically lower the power after a specified period of copier inactivity.
• Auto Reset
Automatically reset to auto mode defaults after a specified period of copier inactivity.
• Auto Shut-Off
Automatically shut off the main power after a specified period of copier inactivity.
• Booklet
Create A5 or A4 booklets from A4 size originals in 1-2 or 2-2 copy mode.
• Chapter
Start chapter pages on the right side (front pages) of the finished document. Only duplex
mode (1-2 or 2-2) is compatible.
• Combination
Copy a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paper.
• Copy Density
Manually select up to 9 density levels.
• Copy Mode
Select the desired simplex mode (1-1 or 2-1); or duplex mode (1-2 or 2-2).
1-2
Section 1 : Introduction
1
Introduction
Features of the Konica 7065 (continued)
• Data Printing
Print the following three types of data for confirmation; copy quantity for each password,
copy limit for each password, copy quantity for each paper size.
• Density Shift
Adjust density levels of the four density modes (Auto, Text, Photo, Increase Contrast) into
two levels to lighter and three levels to darker.
• Dual Page
Copy both pages of an open book or book-size sheet separately onto two A4 sheets in 11 mode or separately onto each side of one A4 sheet in 1-2 mode. You can use the Dual
Page mode with the Front or Front/Back cover mode. The cover page(s) will be scanned
and copied normally before image division is performed on the other pages.
• Frame/Fold Erasure
Erase border and/or fold image area using Frame (1 - 15mm), Fold (1 - 30mm), or Frame
& Fold.
• Image Insert
Store pages in memory from the platen glass, and insert the pages into a document
copied from the document feeder.
• Image Rotation
Before copying, rotate the original image when its portrait/landscape orientation is different
from the copy paper orientation.
• Image Shift
Create or remove a binding margin (shift amount from -99 ~ 250mm in 1mm increments);
reduce image to prevent image loss (reduce & shift amount from 1 ~ 250mm in 1mm
increments).
• Interrupt Copying
Interrupt copying in progress to perform copying from the platen glass or document feeder.
• Job Memory
Program up to 15 jobs and Recall each job by job number or name, as needed. All
compatible platen glass functions can be programmed into Job Memory directly after they
are selected.
• Lens Mode (Preset, Zoom)
Select Preset ratios, three reduction and three enlargement ratios.
Zoom ratios can be selected from 33% ~ 400% in 1% increments.
• Machine Status Confirmation
Display the current machine status on LCD for confirmation.
• Magnification
Set user-programmable ratios under User Set 1, User Set 2 and User Set 3.
1-3
Section 1 : Introduction
Features of the Konica 7065 (continued)
• Manual Shut-off/Low power
Shut off or Low power the main power when pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] key.
• Mixed Original
Copy mixed size originals from the document feeder in APS or AMS mode. APS
automatically selects the copy size of each original. AMS mode allows you to select one
paper size for all originals.
• Non Image Area Erase
When copying from the platen glass when the document cover is open, copy only the
image area and not the exposed area of glass, which would otherwise copy as black.
• Non STD Size
Identifies the special original size which the 7065 could not detect in order to select the
optimal paper size for copying or printing.
• OHP Interleave
Copy onto transparency film and interleave blank or copied paper for each original copied.
• Output for Machine with FS-106 Finisher Installed:
Non-Sort, Sort, Staple-Sort, and Group modes using the primary (main) tray
Non-Sort Face Down exit, Non-Sort Face Up exit, Group Face Down exit, and
Group Face Up exit modes using the secondary (sub) tray
Select an output tray and output mode on the Output Mode Screen and on the Control
panel. For details of each output mode, see Section 7: Output Modes.
• Output for Machine with FS-108BM Finisher Installed:
Non-Sort, Sort, Staple-Sort, and Group modes using the primary (main) tray
Non-Sort Face Down exit, Non-Sort Face Up exit, Group Face Down exit, and
Group Face Up exit modes using the secondary (sub) tray
Stapling & Folding, and Folding modes using the booklet tray
Select an output tray and output mode on the Output Mode Screen and on the Control
panel. For details of each output mode, see Section 7: Output Modes.
• Output for Machine with no Finisher Installed: Sort and Group modes
Use the default condition to output copies in the same order as the originals. Use the Sort
mode to alternately switch the horizontal and vertical orientation of each copied set upon
exit. Use the Group mode to output multiple copies of each original without offsetting them
upon exit.
• Output for FS-108BM Finisher with PI-108 Cover Sheet Feeder Installed:
Cover Sheet mode
Manual Staple mode
For details of each output mode, see Section 7: Output Modes.
• Overlay
Copy multi-originals so that each includes a common image overlay, previously scanned.
1-4
Section 1 : Introduction
1
Introduction
Features of the Konica 7065 (continued)
• Paper Capacity
Total 3600 sheets, including two 500-sheet trays, a 1,500-sheet tray, a 1,000-sheet tray,
and a 100-sheet Multi Sheet Bypass tray.
• Platen Memory
Scan documents into memory from the platen glass and/or the document feeder and
insert the pages into another document copied from the document feeder. If an incompatible
function is selected in this mode, the latter function will not be selected, and a Caution
message will be displayed.
• Power Saver
Automatically turns off all but nominal power supply after a specified period of copier
inactivity, for optimal efficiency. Power is returned after a brief warm up period by pressing
[POWER SAVER ON/OFF] key on the Control panel.
• Program Job
Scan documents into memory while designating different tray for each original, then print
all the images collectively. Use this function when copies require several paper types.
• Proof Copy
To ensure correct output before running multiple copies, run a proof copy by touching
PROOF COPY on the Check Screen or pressing [PROOF COPY] key on the Control
panel.
• Repeat Image
Select the horizontal image area across the page, and repeat it down the page as many
times as the repeat width setting (10 ~ 300mm) permits in manual or auto.
• Reserve
Scan in subsequent copy jobs while the 7065 is busy printing or copying.
• Resolution (High, Very High)
High resolution mode and Very High resolution mode provide optimal image quality for
photos and complicated graphics and text which contain a large amount of detail.
• Reverse Image
Reverse the image from black-on-white to white-on-black or vice versa.
• Sheet/Cover Insertion
Insert up to 15 blank or copied sheets from Tray 1, Tray 3, or the Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray,
or insert blank or copied front and back covers from Tray 1, Tray 3 or the Multi-Sheet
Bypass Tray.
• Staple
Select the stapling position and number of staples.
• Text/Photo Enhance
Enhance photo image in Photo mode; enhance text image in Text mode; enhance lighter
image in increase contrast mode.
1-5
Section 1 : Introduction
Features of the Konica 7065 (continued)
• Thin/Thick Paper
Use Thin mode when copy paper weight is less than 60g/m2; use Thick mode when copy
paper weight is over 90g/m2.
• Userset Density (USERSET 1, USERSET 2)
Output up to 16 density samples on a total of 4 pages that display 4 samples per page,
then program the desired density under USERSET 1 and/or USERSET 2.
• Weekly Timer
Can be set according to the needs of each work environment. Turn main body power Off/
On daily or weekly, during lunch time, on holidays, and also enable the timer-interrupt
mode, which allows temporary use of the machine even when the machine is in the daily,
weekly, or holiday Off mode.
• Z-Folded Original
This feature set the RADF to accept the Z-folded originals.
1-6
Section 1 : Introduction
1
Introduction
Copier Features
Standard Equipment
Main Body with 4 Paper Trays (500/500/1,000/1,500 sheets)
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) (DF-312)
Automatic Duplex Unit (ADU)
Configuration Options:
with Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray (100 sheets)
Optional Equipment
Stapler Finisher (FS-106)
This finisher is equipped with two exit trays.
Secondary (sub) tray: Four output types can be specified on the Output Mode Screen.
(1) Non-sort and face down exit
(2) Non-sort and face up exit
(3) Group and face down exit
(4) Group and face up exit
Primary (main) tray: Four output types can be specified by [STAPLE SORT] and [SORT]
keys on the Control panel and by the setting on the Output Mode Screen. Face up exit
is not available.
(1) Non-sort exit
(2) Sort exit
(3) Staple sort exit
(4) Group exit
Stapler Finisher (FS-108BM)
This finisher is equipped with three exit trays and a cover sheet feeder (option).
Secondary (sub) tray: Four output types can be specified on the Output Mode Screen.
(1) Non-sort and face down exit
(2) Non-sort and face up exit
(3) Group and face down exit
(4) Group and face up exit
Primary (main) tray: Four output types can be specified by [STAPLE SORT] and [SORT]
keys on the Control panel and by the setting on the Output Mode Screen. Face up exit
is not available.
(1) Non-sort exit
(2) Sort exit
(3) Staple sort exit
(4) Group exit
Booklet tray: Stapled and folded, or simply folded booklets are to be delivered onto this
tray. These two finishing modes can be specified on the Output Mode Screen.
Cover Sheet Feeder (PI-108)
Used when selecting COVER SHEET on the Output Mode Screen, or when stapling
copies manually.
Large Capacity Tray (LT-352) (3,500 sheets)
Expanded Memory Unit-32MB
Video Interface Kit
Tandem Kit 7065
1-7
Section 2 : Safety Information
2
Safety
Information
Caution Labels and Indicator
Danger, Warning and Caution Symbols
Requirements for Safe Use
Power Source
Environment
Precautions for Routine Handling
Section 2 : Safety Information
Caution Labels and Indicator
The caution labels and indicator are attached to the machine areas, as shown below,
where you are advised to pay special attention to avoid any dangerous situations or
serious injury.
CAUTION
If you touch any place which you are advised by any caution label or caution indicator to
keep yourself away from, you may be burned or injured. Do not remove caution labels or
indicators. If any caution label or caution indicator is soiled, please clean to make legible.
If you cannot make them legible, or if the caution label or indicator is damaged, please
contact your service centre.
CAUTION
High temperature!
Do not touch. Use
care when
clearing paper.
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
This internal area is
very hot. To avoid
getting burned DO
NOT TOUCH.
CAUTION
This internal area is
very hot. To avoid
getting burned DO
NOT TOUCH.
2-2
High temperature!
Do not touch. Use care when
clearing paper.
This area generates high
voltage. To avoid an
electrical shock DO NOT
TOUCH.
CAUTION
The ADU guide plate is not latched
when raised. Do not release it,
otherwise the ADU guide plate will
slam shut and may cause injury.
Section 2 : Safety Information
CAUTION
2
CAUTION
Use care after opening the paper exit
outlet. DO NOT put your hand into it;
otherwise you may be injured.
Safety
Information
Use care after opening the
paper exit outlet.
DO NOT put your hand into it;
otherwise you may be injured.
FS-106 Finisher
FS-108BM Finisher
CAUTION
Inside the lower paper exit
outlet is the roller drive unit.
DO NOT put your hand into it;
otherwise you may be injured.
2-3
Section 2 : Safety Information
Danger, Warning and Caution Symbols
The following indicators are used on the caution labels or in this manual to categorize the
level of safety cautions.
DANGER:
Action highly liable to cause a death or serious injury.
WARNING:
Action liable to cause a death or serious injury.
CAUTION:
Action liable to cause light injury, medium trouble or physical damage.
If you find any of these indicators when removing jammed paper, adding toner, or reading
the manual, be sure to follow the information.
If the safety cautions in the manual become illegible due to soilage, etc., please buy a new
copy from your service centre.
2-4
Section 2 : Safety Information
Requirements for Safe Use
To ensure your safe use of the machine, the following describes the precautions you are
required to observe without fail for the power source of the machine and during installation
and routine handling. Be sure to read and observe them.
Power Source
CAUTION: Plug Socket
• A plug socket is limited in capacity. Use only a power source with the correct rating for
the machine; otherwise, hazardous situations such as smoking or igniting may occur.
See the following list to match the power supply and power consumption:
a) 230V/50Hz: More than 10A
b) 110V/60Hz: More than 15A
c) 230V/60Hz: More than 10A
d) 127V/60Hz: More than 15A
• Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet. Do not use multiple outlet adaptors.
CAUTION: Power Plug and Lead
• Be sure to insert the power plug firmly into the power socket. Otherwise an accident
may occur as a result of smoking or igniting. If the inserted power plug is loose in the
socket, even after it has been positively inserted, disconnect the plug and contact your
electrical contractor.
• For plug cable equipment, that the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment
and shall be easily accessible.
• Do not bend or crush the power lead. If your copier power lead is bent or damaged in
any way, contact your Service Centre immediately. Do not attempt to repair it yourself,
and do not continue to operate the copier. A damaged power lead may result in
overheating, a short circuit, or fire.
• Do not bundle or coil the power lead of the copier. Otherwise an accident may occur
as a result of overheating or fire.
CAUTION: Connecting Multiple Loads to One Socket Outlet Prohibited
Never connect multiple loads to one socket outlet using a multi-outlet extension lead or
branched socket. Otherwise an accident may occur as a result of overheating or fire.
CAUTION: Extension Lead
An extension lead is limited in capacity. Unless the lead has adequate capacity, smoking
and/or igniting may occur, and an accident may be caused from overheating. Should
smoking and/or igniting occur, contact your electrical contractor immediately. If you require
further information about power requirements, power consumption, extension leads,
adapters and connectors, please contact your Konica service centre, and also consult
your electrical contractor.
When using an extension lead with a reel, let out the full length from the reel. Using the
lead in rolled-up condition may result in overheating, smoking and/or igniting.
2-5
2
Safety
Information
Section 2 : Safety Information
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
Power Source (continued)
WARNING: Earth wire (Taiwan and the Philippines Only)
• Be sure to attach the earth wire to the machine and connect it to the ground correctly;
otherwise, a leak may occur to electrically shock the operator during machine operation.
The earth wire is supplied as an accessory to the machine.
• The earth wire connected to any inadequate place may cause explosion or electric
shock.
Do not connect the earth wire to any of the following:
(1) Gas pipe
(2) Lightening conductor
(3) Earth wire for telephone
(4) Resin water pipe, or any water pipe or tap not allowed to be connected to the earth
wire by Waterworks Office
If you have any questions on connecting the earth wire, please consult your service
centre.
2-6
Section 2 : Safety Information
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
2
Safety
Information
Environment
CAUTION: Prevention of Fire
Do not install near flammable materials, curtains and
volatile combustibles, that can catch or cause fire.
CAUTION: Prevention of Short Circuit
Do not install the copier where it could be splashed
with rain water, or water from a tap, to avoid a short
circuit.
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity
• Keep away from direct sunlight, heat sources such
as stoves, cool air from an air conditioner and hot
air from a heater.
• Avoid any environment that is outside the range
shown below:
10 to 30°C in temperature
10 to 80% in humidity.
CAUTION: Ventilation
• Maintain the installation place well-ventilated.
• Keep away from dust or corrosive gases. These materials may cause poor image
quality.
• During the use of machine, the machine generates ozone but in an insufficient amount
to cause any hazard to the human body.
However, if the machine is used in a poorly ventilated room, many copies are made,
or plural copiers are used at the same time, an odour may be detected. Ensure adequate
ventilation for a comfortable working environment.
CAUTION: Vibration
Do not install on a floor which is subject to vibration or is not level.
2-7
Section 2 : Safety Information
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
Environment (continued)
CAUTION: Installation Space
Allow sufficient space for facilitating copy operation, changing parts, and periodic inspection.
Especially leave an adequate space behind the machine to let hot air out from the rear
fan.
(Unit: mm)
450
710
800
500
200
400
756
1664
1164
1606
1710
Konica 7065
362
756
464
210*
315
500
710
800
1664
1164
1710
1897
525
2107
*: The dimention required when withdrawing the Large Capacity Tray (LT-352)
Konica 7065 + FS-106 Finisher + LT-352
2-8
200
Section 2 : Safety Information
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
2
Safety
Information
Environment (continued)
40
322
756
544
210*
315
500
710
800
200
1664
1164
1710
1977
525
2187
*: The dimention required when withdrawing the Large Capacity Tray (LT-352)
Konica 7065 + FS-108BM Finisher + LT-352
Please Be Reminded!
Finisher primary (main) tray of FS-106/FS-108BM Finisher gradually goes down while printed
material is output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray on the left
side of the finisher, as any interference may cause damage to the finisher.
2-9
Section 2 : Safety Information
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
Precautions for Routine Handling
WARNING: High Voltage
DO NOT TOUCH the high voltage parts indicated with WARNING label or described in
the manual.
CAUTION: Actions in Response to Troubles
• If the Service Call screen is displayed and copier operations cannot be continued any
more, stop the operation to prevent any unexpected accident. Write down the report
code as stated on 2 line of the message, then switch off the copier and disconnect from
the power socket. Contact your service centre and inform them of the report code.
• Do not touch the high temperature parts indicated with CAUTION labels or described
in the manual.
• Do not touch the inside of the machine for any other purpose than removing jammed
paper or adding toner.
• If machine repair is necessary, be sure to contact your service centre. Never attempt
to repair it by yourself.
• If any abnormal sound, smell or smoke comes from the machine, immediately stop
using it, turn off the power switch, disconnect the power plug and contact your service
centre.
• If the breaker trips or the fuse blows, turn off the power switch, reset the breaker or the
fuse, and turn on the machine. If the same situation occurs again, contact your service
centre.
• Insure the replacement fuse conforms with the rating of the power source. Never use
a fuse with an incorrect rating.
CAUTION: Prevention of Fire
Do not use volatile combustibles such as a thinner or alcohol near the machine.
CAUTION: Prohibition of Machine Modification
Do not modify or remove any parts by yourself.
2 - 10
Section 2 : Safety Information
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
2
Safety
Information
Precautions for Routine Handling (continued)
CAUTION: Prevention of Machine Troubles
• Do not drop small metallic objects such as paper clips or
staples inside the machine.
• Do not place any heavy or hard objects such as a vase,
books or ornaments on the machine.
CAUTION: Recommendation of Periodic Check
Be sure to check periodically the following points:
(1) The main lead or the power plug does not generate abnormal heat.
(2) The power plug is not inserted loosely or the lead is not cut or scratched.
(3) The earth wire is correctly connected.
(4) The power plug or the power outlet is not covered with dust.
If you find anything abnormal in the above items, stop using the machine and contact your
service centre.
CAUTION: Toner
• Keep the toner cartridge away from children. The toner is nontoxic; however if you
inhale or contact with eyes by accident, flush with water and seek medical advice.
• Do not throw the empty toner cartridge into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire the toner may
ignite and cause a dangerous situation.
CAUTION: FS-106 Finisher Paper Capacity
The capacity of the FS-106 Finisher exit tray is listed below. When the total number of
copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst
the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following
capacity is for 80g/m2 paper. The limit will decrease when loading the exit tray with copies
of different sizes.
Primary (Main) Tray: Non-Sort/Sort/Group Mode
500 sheets max. (A5*1, B6*2)
2,000 sheets max. (A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R)
1,500 sheets max. (A3, B4)
*1: Load A5 in landscape orientation ( ) only.
*2: Load B6 in landscape orientation ( ) only using Non-sort mode (unavailable when using Sort/
Group mode).
Primary (Main) Tray: Staple-Sort Mode
1,000 sheets max. (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R)
(The maximum number of sheets varies depending on the number of originals, copied
paper size and a stapled position. See p. 4-7.)
Secondary (Sub) Tray: Non-Sort Mode
200 sheets max. (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5*, B6*, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R)
* : Load A5 and B6 in landscape orientation (
) only.
2 - 11
Section 2 : Safety Information
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
Precautions for Routine Handling (continued)
CAUTION: FS-108BM Finisher Paper Capacity
The capacity of the FS-108BM Finisher exit tray is listed below. When the total number of
copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst
the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following
capacity is for 80g/m2 paper. The limit will decrease when loading the exit tray with copies
of different sizes.
Primary (Main) Tray: Non-Sort/Sort/Group Mode
500 sheets max. (A5*1, B6*2)
3,000 sheets max. (A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R)
1,500 sheets max. (A3, B4)
*1: Load A5 in landscape orientation ( ) only.
*2: Load B6 in landscape orientation ( ) only in Non-sort mode (unavailable in Sort/Group mode).
Primary (Main) Tray: Staple-Sort Mode
1,000 sheets max. (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R)
(The maximum number of sheets varies depending on the number of originals, copied
paper size and a stapled position. See p. 4-8.)
Secondary (Sub) Tray: Non-Sort Mode
200 sheets max. (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5*, B6*, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R)
* : Load A5 and B6 in landscape orientation (
) only.
Booklet Tray
100 sheets max. (A3, B4, A4R, 8.5"x11"R)
(The maximum number of sheets varies depending on pages of a booklet and selecting
either the Folding or the Stapling & Folding. See p. 4-9.)
CAUTION: Inside Booklet Mode Outlet
Inside the Booklet mode outlet is the roller drive unit. DO NOT put your hand into it, when
removing the folded or stapled & folded sheet; otherwise you may be injured.
CAUTION: Finisher Paper Exit Outlet
To avoid injury when stapling large size copies, DO NOT put your hand into the open
Paper Exit Outlet.
CAUTION: Paper Capacity for the Exit Tray
The exit tray capacity is 100 sheets. If a copy run of more than 100 is required, be sure
to remove the copies from the exit tray before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure
to do so will cause the copier to jam.
2 - 12
Section 2 : Safety Information
Requirements for Safe Use (continued)
2
Safety
Information
Precautions for Routine Handling (continued)
CAUTION: Power Saver and Weekly Timer
• During Power Saver mode the copier is still connected to the mains power supply and
power is still applied to certain areas of the machine. To avoid any unexpected troubles
turn the power OFF when not using the copier for long periods of time.
• When the Weekly Timer indicator is lit, turning power OFF will disable weekly timer
function.
CAUTION: Fixing Unit
The Fixing unit is internally very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH. Be
careful when withdrawing the fixing unit.
WARNING: Drum Unit
The drum unit has a high voltage generated.
To avoid an electrical shock, DO NOT TOUCH.
CAUTION: ADU Guide Plate
The ADU guide plate is not latched when raised. Do not release it, otherwise the ADU
guide plate will slam shut and may cause injury.
CAUTION: Dispose of a Disused Copying Machine
Do not dispose of this copier yourself. Contact your service centre, who can arrange for
its safe disposal.
If you change the place of installation, please contact your service centre.
2 - 13
Section 3: Machine Information
Machine Configuration
External Machine Call-Outs
Internal Machine Call-Outs
Standard/Optional Equipment
Control Panel Layout
Touch Screen
Full-Automatic Mode Screen
Basic Screen (Layer Selection Screen)
Basic Screen (Direct Selection Screen)
Initial Settings
Auto/Reset Mode
Automatic Paper Selection (APS)
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS)
Automatic Exposure (AE)
Automatic Tray Switching (ATS)
Lead Edge Delete
Service Settings
Finisher-Paper Capacity
Key Operator Password
EKC Master Key Code
Weekly Timer Master Key Code
Weekly Timer Key in Help Screen
Control Panel Contrast Key in Help Screen
Staple Sheet Capacity
Notice Message: ADD TONER/ PM CALL/ APPLICATION/INTERRUPT
Basic Screen Selection
3
Machine
Information
Machine
Configuration
Control Panel/
Touch Screen
Automatic
Settings
Service
Settings
Section 3 : Machine Information
Machine Configuration
External Machine
!9LCD touch screen
!8Power switch
@0Control panel
qRADF
wWork table
eMulti-sheet
bypass tray
!7Finisher FS-108BM
(option)
rKey counter (option)
tUpper right side cover
!6Left side cover
(not shown)
yLCT door
!5Front door
!4Tray 1
(Universal tray)
!3Tray 2
!2ADU
!1Tray 4
!0Tray 3
oLower right side
cover (not shown)
uTray 5: Large
capacity tray
LT-352(option)
iPaper level indicator
Internal Machine
qToner box
uTotal counter
wDrum unit
yFixing unit
eKnob 3
tLever 2
rLever 1
3-2
Section 3 : Machine Information
Machine Configuration (continued)
External Machine Call-outs
q RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds multiple
originals one at a time to the platen glass for copying.
w Work table provides a convenient workspace for documents both before and after
copying.
e Multi-sheet bypass tray used for small quantity copying onto plain paper or special
paper.
r Key counter (option) manages the number of copies made on the machine.
t Upper right side cover opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.
y LCT door opens to allow loading paper.
u Tray 5: Large capacity tray LT-352 (option) is initially fixed at A4 and holds 3,500
sheets.
i Paper level indicator indicates the approximate number of sheets remaining in the
LCT.
o Lower right side cover opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.
!0 Tray 3 is fixed at A4 and holds 1,000 sheets.
It can be reset by service to size B5 or 8.5"x11".
!1 Tray 4 is initially fixed at A4 and holds 1,500 sheets.
It can be reset by service to size A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5"x11" or 8.5"x11"R.
!2 ADU is used for stackless duplex copying.
!3 Tray 2 is initially fixed at A3 and holds 500 sheets.
It can be reset by service to size A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 11"x17", 8.5"x14",
8.5"x11"R or 8.5"x11".
!4 Tray 1 (universal tray) is user adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either A3/B4/F4 /
A4R/A4/B5R/B5/A5* or B6*
!5 Front door opens to the internal copier to allow clearing of mishandled paper and
replenishing of toner.
!6 Left side cover opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.
!7 Finisher FS-108BM (option) sorts, staple-sorts, and groups copies into finished sets.
!8 Power switch turns copier power On/Off when pressed.
!99 LCD touch screen displays interactive operation screens.
@0 Control panel controls copier operations.
NOTE:
*: A5 or B6 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
Internal Machine Call-outs
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
Toner box holds the toner supply.
Drum unit forms the copy image.
Knob 3 can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper.
Lever 1 can be moved to ease removal of mishandled paper.
Lever 2 can be moved to ease removal of mishandled paper from the fixing unit.
Fixing unit fuses the toner onto the copy paper.
Total counter indicates the total number of copies made.
3-3
3
Machine
Information
Machine
Configuration
Section 3 : Machine Information
Machine Configuration (continued)
Standard/Optional Equipment
FS-108BM Finisher
(see details below)
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder - RADF (DF-312)
Work Table
Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray (100 sheets)
Tray 1 (500 sheets)
Tray 2 (500 sheets)
Automatic Duplex Unit - ADU
Tray 3 (1,000 sheets)
Tray 4 (1,500 sheets)
FS-106 Finisher details
Primary (main) tray:
holds ejected paper as sorted sets.
Select Sort mode to output offsetsorted sets; Staple mode to output
stapled sets; Group mode to output
offset-grouped sets.
Tray 5: Large Capacity Tray
(LT-352) (3,500 sheets)
(see details below)
Large Capacity Tray details
Secondary (sub) tray:
holds ejected paper in the
LCT upper door:
following four modes designated
opens to load paper.
on the Output Mode screen:
q Non-sort Face Down exit
w Non-sort Face Up exit
e Group Face Down exit
r Group Face Up exit
Finisher door:
opens to change
the staple cartridge
and to remove
mishandled paper.
Large Capacity
Paper level indicator: Tray (LT-352)
indicates the approximate
number of sheets.
FS-106 Finisher
FS-108BM Finisher details
Cover sheet feeder (option):
sets the cover sheet when
selecting Cover Sheet on
Output Mode Screen, or
sets a copied set in
manual stapling.
Primary (main) tray:
holds ejected paper as sorted sets.
Select Sort mode to output off setsorted sets; Staple sort mode to
output stapled sets; Group mode to
output offset-grouped sets.
Booklet tray
3-4
Secondary (sub) tray:
holds ejected paper in the
following four modes designated
on the Output Mode screen:
q Non-sort Face Down exit
w Non-sort Face Up exit
e Group Face Down exit
r Group Face Up exit
Manual stapling
control panel
Finisher door
FS-108BM Finisher
Booklet mode outlet:
ejects finished copied sets
when selecting Folding mode
or Stapling & Folding mode.
Section 3 : Machine Information
Control Panel Layout
r
q
t y o !0 !1 !5
!6
!7 !8
!9 @0
3
Machine
Information
COPY
TIMER
PRINTER
TANDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
POWER SAVER
ON / OFF
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
PROOF COPY
Machine
Configuration
OUTPUT
APPLICATION
CHECK
HELP
Control Panel/
Touch Screen
STOP / CLEAR
STAPLE SORT
ROTATION OFF
JOB MEMORY
SORT
STORE
AUTO RESET
w
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
@1
@2
@3
@4
@5
e
u i
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
!2 !3 !4 @1 @2 @3
START PRINT
@4
@5
OUTPUT displays a screen for selecting an output condition.
STAPLE SORT selects Staple-sort mode.
SORT selects Sort mode.
LCD TOUCH SCREEN displays machine and copying status; help information;
interactive screens; and touch keys for selecting all functions.
APPLICATION displays a menu for selecting special application functions.
SPECIAL ORIGINAL displays a screen for selecting conditions to scan originals.
ROTATION OFF selects/deselects the image rotation function.
STORE stores platen/RADF originals into memory, then copies the whole set.
MODE INDICATOR lights when copy/printer/tandem mode is set.
MODE switches copy, printer, and tandem mode.
HELP displays a screen with help for the currently selected function.
CHECK displays a screen showing all settings that are selected for the current job.
AUTO RESET restores copier to automatic mode settings or to key operator settings.
JOB MEMORY displays screens for selecting job store/job recall functions.
KEYPAD enters numeric values.
PRINT QUANTITY indicator displays the current print quantity setting.
PROOF COPY outputs a single set of copies to confirm whether the current settings
are selected properly.
INTERRUPT stops copying in progress to allow copying from the platen glass.
POWER SAVER ON/OFF activates power-saving mode for times when the copier
is inactive, or activates timer interrupt mode when weekly timer function is active.
TIMER lights when the timer function is set.
[P] accesses programming modes for setting special functions.
[0] RECALL recalls the print quantity of the current job.
CLEAR QTY. allows resetting of print quantity.
START PRINT activates copying.
STOP/CLEAR stops the copying sequence; deletes the stored memory.
3-5
Section 3 : Machine Information
Touch Screen
The touch screen is an LCD that displays interactive screens with touch sensitive keys for
making copy job selections. Selections are highlighted at the touch. The screens also
work with the conventional control panel keys.
CAUTION:
The touch screen of the control panel is covered with glass. Do not drop heavy items on
the glass, or put excess weight or pressure on it; otherwise the glass may break or become
scratched.
After the power switch is turned on, the Konica name displays for approximately 10 seconds,
until initial machine settings are established. Then, the Warm-Up Screen displays for
approximately 6.5 minutes, until the fixing temperature is reached.
When the Basic Screen (or Full-Automatic Mode screen) is displayed, the touch screen
becomes interactive. The interactive condition enables you to communicate directly with
the copier system simply by touching keys displayed on the screen; or by pressing
conventional keys, as required. In addition, the screens automatically display information
regarding machine and copying status. Additional help is available any time with the [HELP]
key, which can be pressed from any screen, except from Job Memory or Key Operator
Mode Screens.
Full-Automatic Mode Screen
The Full-Automatic mode displays after warm-up. As shown in Initial setting on p. 3-8,
Full-Automatic settings include Print Quantity 1; Copy Mode 1s1; Lens Mode 1:1; RADF
on; AE, APS on; Finisher off.
Except for Print Quantity, all Full-Automatic Mode settings can be changed by the key
operator in the Initial Setting Menu Screen. In this case, the Basic Screen displays after
warm-up instead of the Full-Automatic Mode Screen.
The following modes can be accessed from this screen: Copy Mode, Copy Density, Lens
Mode, Paper Size.
Full-Automatic Mode Screen
3-6
Section 3 : Machine Information
Touch Screen (continued)
Basic Screen (Layer Selection Screen)
The 7065 Layer Selection Screen is the default basic screen. To switch the default basic
screen to the Direct Selection Screen, contact your service representative.
The Basic Screen includes a two-line message bar at the top; a user-interactive portion
in the centre; and mode keys at the bottom for selecting Copy Mode, Copy Density, Lens
Mode and Paper Size. This screen enables you to use touch keys on the screen as well
as conventional keys to select modes, function, settings, paper trays, etc. After warm-up,
copying conditions may be set in the Initial Setting Menu of the Key Operator Mode.
Basic Screen
Basic Screen (Direct Selection Screen)
While the Layer Selection Screen displays subsequent screens when each mode key is
pressed, the Direct Selection Screen displays only one screen that shows the mode options
and also registers the selections you make. The Direct Selection Screen does not display
the Full-Automatic Mode Screen.
Basic Screen (Direct Selection Screen)
3-7
3
Machine
Information
Control Panel/
Touch Screen
Section 3 : Machine Information
Initial Settings
Initial settings represent the initial condition when power is turned on; when EKC password
is set; or when Auto/Reset mode is restored, either manually or automatically.
Print Quantity; 1
Magnification Ratio: 1:1 (key operator setting)
RADF: ON (key operator setting)
Copy mode: 1-1 mode (key operator setting)
AE: (Automatic Exposure) : ON (key operator setting)
APS: (Automatic Paper Selection): ON (key operator setting)
Finisher: Non-sort on Primary (main) tray (key operator setting)
Auto/Reset Mode
The Auto/Reset function can be set for OFF/ 30 seconds/ 1 minute/ 1.5 minutes/ 2 minutes/
2.5 minutes/ 3 minutes/ 3.5 minutes/ 4 minutes/ 4.5 minutes/ 5 minutes by the key operator.
Initially, the mode is set to function after 1 minute of copier inactivity. The Auto/Reset key
function also re-displays the Basic Screen, unless these settings are changed by the key
operator in the Initial Setting Menu Screen. See p. 12-42 to p. 12-46.
Automatic Paper Selection (APS)
When APS is highlighted on the touch screen, the appropriate copy paper size is
automatically selected. When copying from the platen glass or document feeder, APS
detects the sizes indicated below. For key operator settings of APS, see p. 12-42 to p. 1246.
❒ PLATEN GLASS: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R (B6R or 5.5"x8.5")
❒ RADF: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, A5, 8.5"x11"
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS)
AMS functions automatically when Copy Size is pressed in the Full-Auto mode. An
appropriate ratio is selected, based on the relationship of copy size to original size.
Automatic Exposure (AE)
When AE is highlighted on the touch screen, the appropriate exposure level is automatically
selected to match the copy density of the original. Manual density adjustments override
AE.
Automatic Tray Switching (ATS)
When the selected paper tray becomes empty while copying is in progress, automatic tray
switching detects the same copy paper size loaded in another tray to allow copying to be
continued without interruption. The Multi-sheet bypass tray is not included in tray switching.
Automatic Tray Switching is switched on by using the key operator mode.
3-8
Section 3 : Machine Information
Lead Edge Delete
When using the RADF, image deletion of a few millimeters will occur on the lead edge for
the purpose of controlling copy quality and copy reliability, unless deactivated by the key
operator. See p. 12-42 to p. 12-46.
3
Machine
Information
Service Settings
The following functions can be provided by your Konica service representative, who is
authorized to change DIP switch settings. Contact your service centre if setting change is
required.
Automatic
Settings
Finisher-Paper Capacity
Service
Settings
In the default condition, the 7065 will produce unlimited sets. If required, service can set
the copier to stop copying when the number of copies exceeds specified capacity.
Key Operator Password
Service can set a 4-digit Key operator password to access the Key Operator Mode Screen.
After this setting, a Password Entry Screen will display and require entry of the Key operator
password to access the Key Operator Mode Screen.
EKC Master Key Code
Service can set an 8-digit EKC master key code to access the EKC Setting Menu Screen.
After this setting, the EKC Master Key Code Screen will be displayed and will always
require entry of the set EKC master key code to access the EKC Setting Menu Screen.
Weekly Timer Master Key Code
Service can set a 4-digit Weekly timer master key code to access the Weekly Timer
Setting Menu Screen. After this setting, the Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen will
be displayed and will always require entry of the set Weekly timer master key code to
access the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.
Weekly Timer Key in Help Screen
Service can set the copier with weekly timer system to display the Weekly timer key on the
Help Screen to check and see the contents of Weekly timer settings.
Control Panel Contrast Key in Help Screen
Service can set the copier to display Control panel contrast key on the Help Screen to
display the Contrast Adjustment Screen for adjusting panel contrast.
3-9
Section 3 : Machine Information
Service Settings (continued)
Staple Sheet Capacity
Staple capacity is changeable, and may be set to 45, 40, or 35 by service.
Notice Message: ADD TONER/ PM CALL/ APPLICATION/INTERRUPT
Service can set the copier to display “ADD TONER” indicator when the toner supply is
low, “PM CALL” when preventive maintenance is required, “APPLICATION” when
Application function is selected, or “INTERRUPT” when Interrupt function is set in the
message area of the screen.
Basic Screen Selection
The 7065 Basic Screen defaults to the Layer Selection Screen type. If you wish to make
your Basic Screen default to the Direct Selection Screen, contact your service centre.
3 - 10
Section 4: Paper Information
Positioning Originals on the Platen Glass
Positioning an Original for Manual Copying
Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)
Positioning Originals
Positioning Mixed Originals
Paper in Main Body Trays
Paper in Large Capacity Tray (LT-352) (Option)
Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
Paper in Automatic Duplex Unit
Paper in FS-106 Finisher (Option)
FS-106 Finisher Primary (Main) Tray
FS-106 Finisher Secondary (Sub) Tray
Paper in FS-108BM Finisher (Option)
FS-108BM Finisher Primary (Main) Tray
FS-108BM Finisher Secondary (Sub) Tray
FS-108BM Finisher Booklet Tray
Paper in Cover Sheet Feeder (PI-108) (Option)
Cover Sheet Feeder
Paper Weight Compatibility Chart
4
Paper
Information
Section 4 : Paper Information
Positioning Originals on the Platen Glass
Positioning an Original for Manual Copying
Use the platen glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document feeder,
e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded, stapled, torn, or in generally
poor condition.
Specifications
❒ All capacities are stated for 80g/m2 paper
❒ Max. original size: A3, sheet or book
❒ Max. book weight/thickness: 6.8kg/30mm
❒ Original placement: Face down on right depth side of glass
Procedure
1 Raise the document cover, as shown in the illustration above.
2 Place original FACE DOWN in the right rear corner, aligning the edge with the right
measuring guide.
3 Gently close the document cover, to prevent the original from shifting on the glass.
CAUTION:
When the finisher/paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets while the paper is exiting; otherwise mishandled paper will occur.
TIP:
To eliminate black copy marks on edges when copying from a book without selecting Dual Page
mode, select Frame/Fold Erasure or Non-image Area Erase in Application mode.
4-2
Section 4 : Paper Information
Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)
Specifications
❒ All capacities are stated for 80g/m2 paper
❒ Max. RADF tray capacity: 50 sheets
❒ Max. original exit tray capacity: 50 sheets
❒ Original size range: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, 8.5"x11"
❒ Original placement: Face up; orientation same as copy paper
❒ Orientation (portrait-landscape): Same as copy paper feeding direction
❒ Original weight: 50~130g/m2 (no special stock)
❒ Curling tolerance/stack height: 10mm or less/20mm or less
4
Paper
Information
ADF MODE 1-1, 1-2
Original size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, 8.5"x11"
Max. feeder capacity: 50 original sheets
RADF MODE 2-2, 2-1
Original size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, 8.5"x11"
Max. feeder capacity: 50 original sheets
NOTE:
*1: A5 is available in both landscape (
) and portrait (
) orientation.
MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL MODE
Original size: A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5, A5*2 mixed,
B4, A4R, B5R, B5, A5*2 mixed,
A4R, B5R, A5*2 mixed, or
B5R, A5*3 mixed
NOTE:
*2: A5 original is available in portrait ( ) orientation only.
) orientation only.
*3: A5 original is available in landscape (
Mixed feeder capacity: 50 original sheets
Unsuitable RADF Originals
1
2
3
Paste-ups or
cut-outs
Curled, creased of
folded originals
6
5
4
Glossy or transparent
originals, OHP film,
art paper, cellophane
Books
Doubled, punched or
stapled originals
Thin or thick originals
4-3
Section 4 : Paper Information
Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) (continued)
Positioning Originals
The document feeder (RADF) automatically feeds up to 50 originals directly to the platen
glass, starting with the top sheet. The RADF should only be used for unstapled, unfolded,
smooth, flat originals.
Specifications
❒ Original size detection requires accurate paper guide adjustment.
❒ APS detects size A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 8.5"x11"
❒ Size, weight, and capacity are specified for all copy modes on p. 4-3.
NOTE:
*: A5 is available in both landscape (
) and portrait (
) orientation.
Procedure
Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed fully.
1 Position original(s) FACE UP on the document feeder tray.
Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP.
2 Adjust paper guides.
4-4
Section 4 : Paper Information
Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) (continued)
Positioning Mixed Originals
Mixed size originals can be copied together from the document feeder in either APS mode
or AMS mode. In APS mode, copies will be output on mixed paper sizes to match the
originals. In AMS mode, copies will be output on one common paper size that you select
in which case an appropriate AMS magnification ratio will be selected automatically. To
use the mixed original mode, see procedure on p. 8-10 to p. 8-12.
4
Paper
Information
Specifications
❒ Mixed original size: A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5, A5*1 mixed,
B4, A4R, B5R, B5, A5*1 mixed,
A4R, B5R, A5*1 mixed, or
B5R, A5*2 mixed
NOTE:
*1: A5 original is available in portrait ( ) orientation only.
*2: A5 original is available in landscape (
) orientation only.
❒ RADF capacity: Max. 50 sheets
❒ Print quantity: Max. 9,999 sheets
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Alternate exit, Reserve with APS, Folding/
Stapling & Folding in APS, Cover sheet with APS
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Non STD size
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP
interleave, Image insert, Dual page, Program job, Non-image area erase, Repeat, Frame/
Fold erasure, AUTO layout, Thin/Thick paper, Image shift, Overlay
Align originals to the back left corner.
Procedure
Before using the Mixed Original mode, be sure the document feeder is closed completely.
1 Arrange originals in order, and place them as described below:
Place A3/B4 originals face up or side 1 up in the document feeder, in landscape
orientation, i.e., with short edge feeding.
Position A4 and B5 sizes in either portrait or landscape orientation.
Position A5 size in landscape orientation except only mixed B5R size original.
2 Position mixed originals FACE UP, aligned with the left rear side of the RADF tray.
3 Adjust the original guide to originals.
4-5
Section 4 : Paper Information
Paper in Main Body Trays
Paper Weight: 60~90g/m2
Total Paper Capacity: 3,600 sheets, including 100-sheet Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
Tray 1: 500 sheets 80g/m2/ user-adjustable to any standard size from A3, B4, F4, A4R,
A4, B5R, B5, A5*, B6*
Tray 2: 500 sheets 80g/m2 / fixed to A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 11"x17", 8.5"x14",
8.5"x11"R, or 8.5"x11" (service adjustable)
Tray 3: 1,000 sheets 80g/m2/ fixed to A4, B5, or 8.5"x11" (service adjustable)
Tray 4: 1,500 sheets 80g/m2/ fixed to A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R, or 8.5"x11" (service
adjustable)
NOTE:
*: A5 or B6 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
Paper in Large Capacity Tray (LT-352) (Option)
Paper Weight: 60~90g/m2
Total Paper Capacity: 7,100 sheets, including four Main body trays and 100-sheet MultiSheet Bypass Tray
Tray 5 (LCT): 3,500 sheets 80g/m2 / fixed to A4 or 8.5"x11"(service adjustable)
Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
Paper Size: Adjustable from A3~B6*
Paper Weight: 50~170g/m2; Special (OHP transparent film, labels, hole punch, rag content)
Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray Capacity: 100 sheets 80g/m2 stacked: single feed special stock
NOTE:
*: A5 or B6 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
Paper in Automatic Duplex Unit
Paper Size: A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*
Paper Weight: 60~90g/m2
Duplex Tray Capacity: Unlimited stackless duplex tray
NOTE:
*: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
NOTE:
Reliability and copy quality are not guaranteed for all Special papers. Use only paper that is
recommended by Konica.
4-6
Section 4 : Paper Information
Paper in FS-106 Finisher (Option)
FS-106 Finisher accepts A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5, B6, 8.5"x11"R, and 8.5"x11"
paper sizes. The finisher tray capacities classified according to paper size in each output
mode are described below.
CAUTION:
When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the
copied sets while the paper is exiting; otherwise mishandled paper will occur.
4
Paper
Information
FS-106 Finisher Primary (Main) Tray
FS-106 Finisher (capacities at 80g/m2, unless otherwise indicated)
Non-sort/Sort/Group mode:
500 sheets A5*1, B6*2
2,000 sheets A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
1,500 sheets A3, B4, F4
Staple-sort mode:
1,000 sheets*3 A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
NOTE:
*1: A5 paper is available in landscape (
) orientation only.
) orientation in Non-sort mode only.
*2: B6 paper is available in landscape (
*3: Variable according to the number of pages to be stapled. See the table below.
Paper Capacity for Staple-sort mode of Finisher FS-106
(for the same size only)
B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5,
8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
A3
2 staples
1 staple
2 staples
1 staple
50 sets
50 sets
100 sets
100 sets
10~20
50
50
50
50
21~30
30
30
30
30
31~40
25
25
25
25
41~50
20
20
20
20
No. of pages
2~9
Service can set the copier to stop copying when the number of copies
exceeds above capacity. Contact your service centre.
FS-106 Finisher Secondary (Sub) Tray
FS-106 Finisher (capacities at 80g/m2, unless otherwise indicated)
200 sheets A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, B6*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
NOTE:
* : A5 or B6 paper is available in landscape (
) orientation only.
4-7
Section 4 : Paper Information
Paper in FS-108BM Finisher (Option)
FS-108BM Finisher accepts A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5, B6, 8.5"x11"R, and 8.5"x11"
paper sizes. The finisher tray capacities classified according to paper size in each output
mode are described below.
CAUTION:
When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the
copied sets while the paper is exiting; otherwise mishandled paper will occur.
FS-108BM Finisher Primary (Main) Tray
FS-108BM Finisher (capacities at 80g/m2, unless otherwise indicated)
Non-sort/Sort/Group mode:
500 sheets A5*1, B6*2
3,000 sheets A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
1,500 sheets A3, B4, F4
Staple-sort mode:
1,000 sheets*3 A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
NOTE:
*1: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
) in Non-sort mode only.
*2: B6 paper is available in landscape orientation (
*3: Variable according to the number of pages to be stapled. See the table below.
Paper Capacity for Staple-sort mode of Finisher FS-108BM
(for the same size only)
B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5,
8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
A3
2 staples
1 staple
2 staples
1 staple
50 sets
50 sets
100 sets
100 sets
10~20
50
50
50
50
21~30
30
30
30
30
31~40
25
25
25
25
41~50
20
20
20
20
No. of pages
2~9
Service can set the copier to stop copying when the number of copies
exceeds above capacity. Contact your service centre.
FS-108BM Finisher Secondary (Sub) Tray
FS-108BM Finisher (capacities at 80g/m2, unless otherwise indicated)
200 sheets A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, B6*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
NOTE:
* : A5 or B6 paper is available in landscape orientation (
4-8
) only.
Section 4 : Paper Information
Paper in FS-108BM Finisher (Option) (continued)
FS-108BM Finisher Booklet Tray
Folding mode:
Paper Size
:
Paper Weight
:
Number of Folded Sheet :
Booklet Tray Capacity :
A3, B4, A4R, 8.5"x11"R
60~90g/m2 paper (80g/m2 paper is recommended)
3 sheets max.
Approx. 100 sheets max.
33 sets max. of 3-sheet-folded booklet
(33 x 3 = 99 sheets)
50 sets max. of 2-sheet-folded booklet
(50 x 2 = 100 sheets)
4
Paper
Information
Stapling & Folding mode:
Paper Size
Paper Weight
: A3, B4, A4R, 8.5"x11"R
: 60~90g/m2 paper (80g/m2 paper is recommended)
one cover paper only (91~200g/m2 paper)
Number of Folded Sheet : 16 sheets max. (using 80g/m2 paper only)
15 sheets max. (using one cover paper)
Booklet Tray Capacity : Approx. 100 sheets max.
20 sets max. of 5-sheet-folded booklet
(20 x 5 = 100 sheets)
10 sets max. of 10-sheet-folded booklet
(10 x 10 = 100 sheets)
6 sets max. of 16-sheet-folded booklet
(6 x 16 = 96 sheets)
CAUTION:
Inside the Booklet mode outlet is the roller drive unit. DO NOT put your hand into it, when
removing the folded or stapled & folded sheet; otherwise you may be injured.
Paper in Cover Sheet Feeder (PI-108) (Option)
Cover Sheet Feeder
Cover Paper Size
Cover Paper weight
: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5, A5*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
: 50~200g/m2 paper
NOTE:
* : A5 paper is available to the manual stapling only.
4-9
Section 4 : Paper Information
Paper Weight Compatibility Chart
RADF
Document Feeder 50 ~ 130g/m2
Main Body Trays
All Trays 60 ~ 90g/m2
Large Capacity Tray
60 ~ 90g/m2
Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
50 ~ 170g/m2
ADU
60 ~ 90g/m2
In-Bin Stapler Finsher FS-106
60 ~ 170g/m2
In-Bin Stapler Finsher FS-108BM
60 ~ 170g/m2
Cover Sheet Feeder PI-108
50 ~ 200g/m2
NOTE:
Reliability and copy quantity are not guaranteed for all Special papers. Use only paper that is
recommended by Konica.
4 - 10
Section 5: Copier Management
Power Saver Mode
Auto Low Power
Manual Low Power
Auto Shut-Off
Manual Shut-Off
Entering an EKC Password
Weekly Timer Function
Timer Interrupt
5
Copier
Management
Power Saver
EKC
Weekly Timer
Section 5 : Copier Management
Power Saver Mode
There are two modes for the Power saver as described below.
Low power mode enables you to conserve energy by maintaining a lower fixing temperature
during periods of copier inactivity.
Shut-off mode conserves even more energy by partially turning OFF the power supply.
CAUTION
During Power Saver mode the copier is still connected to the mains power supply and
power is still applied to certain areas of machine. To avoid any unexpected troubles turn
the power OFF when not using the copier for long periods of time.
Auto Low Power
This function automatically lowers the power after a specified period of copier inactivity.
The Auto low power function can be set to 5 minutes/ 10 minutes/ 15 minutes/ 30 minutes/
60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/ 240 minutes. Initially, the mode is set to function
after 15 minutes of copier inactivity. For the key operator setting, see p. 12-48 to p. 12-49.
When Auto low power is on, the following message will be displayed on the dimmed Basic
screen.
Basic Screen
The [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] LED remains dark.
Release Auto Low Power
Press any key on the control panel other than [START PRINT] and [POWER SAVER ON/
OFF]. The Auto low power will be released and the LCD screen recovers usual brightness.
5-2
Section 5 : Copier Management
Power Saver Mode (Continued)
Manual Low Power
Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The Low Power Setting Screen will be displayed. Touch
YES to activate the Low power mode.
Low Power Setting Screen
5
Copier
Management
Power Saver
NOTE:
The Manual low power setting can be selected by Key operator. For the key operator setting, see
p. 12-42 to p. 12-46. When selecting the Manual low power setting, the Manual shut-off setting is
released.
When Manual low power is on, the following message will be displayed on the dimmed
Basic screen.
Basic Screen
The [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] LED remains dark.
Release Manual Low Power
Press any key on the control panel other than [START PRINT] and [POWER SAVER ON/
OFF]. The Auto low power will be released and the LCD screen recovers usual brightness.
5-3
Section 5 : Copier Management
Power Saver Mode (continued)
Auto Shut-Off
This function automatically shuts off the main power after a specified period of copier
inactivity.
The Auto shut-off can be set for 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/ 240
minutes. Initially, Auto shut-off is set to function after 90 minutes of copier inactivity. For
the key operator setting, see p. 12-48 to p. 12-49.
Release Auto Shut-Off
Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The copying operation will be available.
Manual Shut-Off
Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The Shut-Off Setting Screen will be displayed. Touch
YES to activate the Manual shut-off mode.
Shut-Off Setting Screen
NOTE:
The Manual shut-off setting can be selected by Key operator. For the key operator setting, see p.
12-42 to p. 12-46. When selecting the Manual shut-off setting, the Manual low power setting is
released.
The [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] LED will light and all other LEDs and the LCD screen will
be turned off.
Release Manual Shut-Off
Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The Manual shut-off will be released, with the [POWER
SAVER ON/OFF] LED turned off and the LCD screen displayed.
5-4
Section 5 : Copier Management
Entering an EKC Password
An EKC password is required only when the Electronic Key Counter (EKC) feature is
activated; a User Password is assigned; and “Enter E.K.C. password” is displayed on the
touch screen.
Basic Screen
5
Copier
Management
Power Saver
EKC
Procedure
1 Enter your 5-digit EKC password, using the keypad.
If the EKC password is invalid, the copier will reset to the Initial mode.
In that case, enter the correct password; or contact the key operator.
2 Press [START PRINT] once to display your current copy count and copy limit for 3
sec.
Current count / limit
018888/025000
Ready to copy
When your copy count reaches the copy limit, the following message is displayed:
Copy limit reached
025001/025000
In that case, contact the key operator to reset your copy limit.
3 Make copying selections, and enter print quantity, as required.
4 When all settings are acceptable, press [START PRINT].
5-5
Section 5 : Copier Management
Weekly Timer Function
When a copier is under control of the weekly timer function,
the TIMER indicator on the right side of the control panel is lit.
Important: When the TIMER indicator is lit, the copier will
automatically be turned off. Do not turn it off by pressing power
switch.
TIMER
INTERRUPT
POWER SAVER
ON / OFF
PROOF COPY
STOP / CLEAR
QTY.
START PRINT
Timer Interrupt
When the TIMER indicator light is on and other indicators are off, copying is unavailable
due to the weekly timer function.
However, copying is available by following procedure.
Procedure
1 Press the [POWER SAVER ON/OFF].
The Basic screen will be displayed along with the
messages shown below.
TIMER
INTERRUPT
POWER SAVER
ON / OFF
Please wait
Copier is warming up
PROOF COPY
STOP / CLEAR
Timer interrupt mode
Enter password
QTY.
START PRINT
NOTE:
The timer interrupt password is not factory set and must be entered
by the key operator (see p. 12-41 in “Section 12: Key Operator
Mode”). In the event the timer interrupt password has not been
entered by the key operator, the message shown in Step 3 will
display instead.
2 Enter a 4-digit number timer interrupt password using
the keypad on the control panel.
If an invalid password is entered, continue by entering
the valid 4-digit password.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
Timer interrupt mode
Enter password ✻✻✻✻
ST
3 Press the [START PRINT].
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
Input copy time
0 hour(s) 05 minute(s)
5-6
START PRINT
Section 5 : Copier Management
Weekly Timer Function (continued)
Timer Interrupt (continued)
4 Enter a 1-digit hour (ex. 3 hour is 3) using the keypad on
the control panel. (0 ~ 9)
5 Press the [START PRINT].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
Input copy time
3 hour(s) 05 minute(s)
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
5
START PRINT
Copier
Management
6 Enter a 2-digit minutes (ex. 7 minutes is 07) using the
keypad on the control panel. (05 ~ 59)
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
Input copy time
3 hour(s) 07 minute(s)
PROOF COPY
Weekly Timer
7 Press the [START PRINT].
Copying is available until the set time is up.
ST
Position original in
the RADF
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
8 When timer interrupt of the copier is finished, press the
[POWER SAVER ON/OFF].
TIMER
INTERRUPT
POWER SAVER
ON / OFF
PROOF COPY
STOP / CLEAR
QTY.
START PRINT
9 The Shut-Off Setting Screen will be displayed. Touch YES. The copier returns to the
OFF state and copying is disabled.
5-7
Section 6: Basic Operations
How to Make a Basic Copy
The Full-Automatic Mode
The Basic Screen
Copy Mode
Copy Density
Automatic Exposure (AE)
Manual Mode (Lighter, Normal, Darker)
Userset Density (USERSET 1, USERSET 2)
Density Shift
Lens Mode
Automatic Paper Selection (APS)
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS)
Preset and User Set Ratios
Zoom Mode
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom
Paper Size
6
Basic
Operation
Basic Copy
Copy Mode
Copy Density
Reserve
Set Reserve Job
Troubleshooting in Reserve Setting
Lens Mode
Paper Size
Status
Reserve/
Status
Memory Copy
Platen Memory Copy
RADF Memory Copy
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher
Rotation
Rotation and APS
Rotation and AMS
To Release Automatic Rotation
Memory Copy
Output without
Finisher
Rotation
Check Mode &
Proof Copy
Interrupt Mode
Help Mode
Check Mode and Proof Copy
Interrupt Mode
Help Mode
Using the Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
Multi-sheet
Bypass Tray
Section 6 : Basic Operations
How to Make a Basic Copy
The Full-Automatic Mode
The Full-Automatic Mode Screen displays only if the setting was made in the Initial Setting
Screen of the Key Operator mode (see p. 12-8). The screen displays Full-Automatic setting
when power is turned on; when Auto Power Saver mode is activated; when EKC password
is set; or when Auto/Reset mode is manually or automatically restored.
When the Electronic Key Counter (EKC) is activated, a valid 5-digit EKC password, assigned
by the key operator, must be entered before copying can be performed. See p. 5-5.
If a Key Counter is required, the message “Please insert key counter” is displayed. Insert
a Key Counter.
All of the Full-Automatic settings, except Print Quantity, can be changed by the key operator
in the Initial Setting Menu Screen.
Status key
Full-Automatic Mode Screen
Messages and Copier Status
Staple/Rotation/
Stapling/Folding icon
Notice message
Folder keys
Memory indicator
Basic Mode keys
The Basic Screen
When the copying conditions are changed, or the Initial settings are changed in the Key
Operator mode, the Basic Screen will be displayed.
Basic Screen
Messages and Copier Status
Notice message
Folder keys
Status key
Staple/Rotation/
Stapling/Folding icon
Memory indicator
Settings Options
Basic Mode keys
NOTES:
1 A simple copying job can be selected during warming up. Position originals, then press [START
PRINT]. Copier starts printing after warm-up operation is completed.
2 During the process of successive copying jobs, the message “Warming up” may be displayed
in the message area of the Basic Screen to maintain the copy image quality.
6-2
Section 6 : Basic Operations
How to Make a Basic Copy (continued)
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Close the document feeder securely.
2 Press [STOP/CLEAR] to return to the initial status.
3 As required, set the copying conditions.
Basic Copy Settings on Basic Screen
Copy mode
: see p. 6-5 ~ p. 6-7
Copy density
: see p. 6-8 ~ p. 6-12
Lens mode
: see p. 6-13 ~ p. 6-18
Paper size
: see p. 6-19
Reserve
: see p. 6-20 ~ p. 6-23
Status
: see p. 6-24 ~ p. 6-25
6
Basic
Operation
Other Basic Copying Operations:
Memory copy
Platen memory copy
: see p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27
RADF memory copy
: see p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29
Output mode for machine
without Finisher
: see p. 6-30 ~ p. 6-32
Rotation
: see p. 6-33 ~ p. 6-35
Check mode and Proof copy
: see p. 6-36 ~ p. 6-39
Interrupt mode
: see p. 6-40 ~ p. 6-41
Help mode
: see p. 6-42
Using the multi-sheet bypass tray : see p. 6-43 ~ p. 6-44
Basic Copy
Output mode Operations:
Section 7 describes how to select output modes.
Original scanning condition Selections:
Section 8 describes how to select original scanning conditions.
Application Selections:
Section 9 describes how to select Application functions.
NOTE:
If the Basic Screen displays ADJUSTMENT MODE in the message area, this means that the
machine was left in the service adjustment mode by a service centre. If this occurs, please contact
your service centre and request that the mode be turned off; otherwise copying may be adversely
affected.
6-3
Section 6 : Basic Operations
How to Make a Basic Copy (continued)
2
Position Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
FACE DOWN on Platen Glass
Position original document FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the
platen glass.
3
Enter Print Quantity
Press the Ten keys to set the desired print quantity.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT] to start copying .
CAUTION
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
while the paper is exiting; otherwise, mishandled paper
will occur.
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
6-4
START PRINT
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Copy Mode
The Copy Mode key is used to display a selection screen, from which all copy modes can
be selected: 1s1, 1s2, 2s1, 2s2.
Copy Mode Specifications:
Incompatible functions
1s1: Folding/Stapling & Folding with Booklet, Chapter; Booklet
1s2: OHP interleave; Thick paper in Thin/Thick mode
2s1: Folding/Stapling & Folding with Booklet, Chapter; Booklet; Dual page;
Repeat image; Reverse image; AUTO layout; Non-image area erase
2s2: Repeat image; OHP interleave; Dual page; Reverse image; Thick paper
in Thin/Thick paper; Non-image area erase
RADF capacity
1s1, 1s2, 2s2, 2s1: 50 sheets
6
Basic
Operation
RADF original size requirements
A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, 8.5"x11"
Basic Copy
Copy paper weight requirements
60~90g/m2
Copy Mode
Copy paper size requirements
1s1, 1s2, 2s2, 2s1: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*2
Sort mode paper size (machine with FS-106/FS-108BM Finisher)
A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, A5*2, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
Staple-Sort mode paper size (machine with FS-106/FS-108BM Finisher)
A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
Folding or Stapling & Folding mode paper size (machine with FS-108BM
Finisher)
A3, B4, A4R, 8.5"x11"R
Cover Sheet Feeder paper size (FS-108BM Finisher with PI-108 Cover
Sheet Feeder)
A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5, A5*3, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
NOTE:
*1: A5 original is available in both landscape (
) and portrait (
) only.
*2: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
*3: A5 paper is available to the manual stapling only.
) orientation.
6-5
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Copy Mode (continued)
Before selecting the Copy Mode shown on the screen below, read specifications on the
previous page and see Section 4 for information on positioning originals.
7065
7065
7065
7065
7065
7065
7065
Double-sided original
Duplex copy
1-2 Copying
7065
7065
7065
7065
2-2 Copying
Duplex copy
2-1 Copying
7065
7065
Single-sided originals
Double-sided original
7065
7065
7065
7065
7065
Simplex copy
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Touch COPY MODE to display the Copy Mode Selection Screen.
Available keys: CANCEL, OK
Full-Automatic Mode Screen
Copy Mode Selection Screen
2 Touch the desired mode key: 1s1, 1s2, 2s1, or 2s2.
To immediately de-select the mode, touch CANCEL.
A copy mode key will appear dimmed if it is incompatible with other selections made.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
6-6
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Copy Mode (continued)
2
Position Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
FACE DOWN on Platen Glass
Position original(s) FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the document
feeder, as required.
6
Basic
Operation
3
Enter Print Quantity
Press the Ten keys to set the desired print quantity.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
Copy Mode
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
4
Start Copying
When all settings are acceptable, press [START PRINT].
CAUTION
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
while the paper is exiting; otherwise, mishandled paper
will occur.
To cancel the mode after returning to the Basic Screen,
touch COPY MODE again, touch key for the desired Copy
mode, then touch OK.
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
6-7
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Copy Density
Automatic Exposure (AE)
AE operates with the initial settings. It detects the density of the original image and
automatically selects the appropriate exposure for the copy.
Manual Mode (Lighter, Normal, Darker)
Select manual copy density to adjust exposure (density) when originals are too light or too
dark. Manual adjustments can be made in 9 levels simply by touching the desired exposure
level, from lighter, to normal, to darker.
Full-Automatic Mode Screen
6-8
Density Selection Screen
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Copy Density (continued)
Userset Density (USERSET 1, USERSET 2)
Output copying samples selected from 16 density levels from LIGHTER to NORMAL,
then select the desired exposure and program it as USERSET 1.
Similarly, output copying samples selected from 16 density levels from NORMAL to
DARKER, then select the desired exposure and program it as USERSET 2.
The programmed copy density can be recalled by touching USERSET 1 or USERSET 2 on
the Density Selection Screen.
Procedure
1 Place the original on the platen glass.
6
Basic
Operation
2 Touch COPY DENSITY on the Basic Screen while pressing [P] to display the Userset
Density Setting Screen.
3 To program USERSET 1, proceed with step 4.
To program USERSET 2, touch Userset lighter, and proceed with step 5.
To return to the Basic Screen, touch CANCEL.
Control Panel
ER
DEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTE
PROO
ELP
Userset Density Setting Screen
ORY
SET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
STAR
Full-Automatic Mode Screen
6-9
Copy Density
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Copy Density (continued)
Userset Density (USERSET 1, USERSET 2) (continued)
4 To output the sample sheet of USERSET 1, touch No. 1 1~4, No. 2 5~8, No. 3 9~12,
or No. 4 13~16, then press [START PRINT].
If you do not want to change the Userset darker density level, touch Userset lighter
and proceed to step 5.
To program USERSET 1, select the desired density from the sample sheet and
touch the density No. key (1 to 16), then touch OK. Proceed with step 6.
Userset Density Setting Screen (darker)
Userset Density Setting Screen (lighter)
5 To output the sample sheet of USERSET 2, touch No. 1 1~4, No. 2 5~8, No. 3 9~12,
or No. 4 13~16, then press [START PRINT].
To return to the setting of the Userset darker density level, touch Userset darker.
To return to the Basic Screen, touch CANCEL.
To program USERSET 2, select the desired density from the sample sheet and
touch the density No. key (1 to 16), then touch OK.
6 The Basic Screen will be displayed. Touch COPY DENSITY on the Basic Screen.
The programmed density No. will be displayed on the USERSET key.
Density Selection Screen
6 - 10
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Copy Density (continued)
Density Shift
Density Shift allows the normal range of density settings to be adjusted more towards
lighter settings, or more towards the darker settings.
It is also possible to set different Density Shifts for each of the density modes (Text/photo,
Text, Photo and Increase Contrast).
Density shift 0
Density shift 1
Density shift 2
6
Density shift 3 (standard)
Basic
Operation
Density shift 4
Density shift 5
Procedure
1 Select the density mode.
To select the Text/Photo mode, press [P] then press [5].
The following message will be displayed.
ER
DEM
Copy Density
PRINT QUANTITY
INTE
PROO
ELP
P - mode : 5
Press START to confirm
ORY
SET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
STAR
To select the Text mode, press [P] then press [6].
The following message will be displayed.
P - mode : 6
Press START to confirm
To select the Photo mode, press [P] then press [7].
The following message will be displayed.
P - mode : 7
Press START to confirm
To select the Increase contrast mode, press [P] then press [8].
The following message will be displayed.
P - mode : 8
Press START to confirm
6 - 11
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Copy Density (continued)
Density Shift (continued)
2 Press [START PRINT]. The following message will be
displayed.
In Text/Photo mode (P-mode : 5):
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
Density Shift (Text/Photo)
3 (0 ~ 5)
PROOF COPY
ST
In Text mode (P-mode : 6):
Density Shift (Text)
3 (0 ~ 5)
START PRINT
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
In Photo mode (P-mode : 7):
Density Shift (Photo)
3 (0 ~ 5)
In Increase contrast mode (P-mode : 8):
Density Shift (Increase contrast)
3 (0 ~ 5)
3 Press any key (from 0 - 5) using the keypad to determine the Density shift.
NOTE:
When 6 or above is entered, 5 is selected.
4 Press [STOP/CLEAR]. Density shift is determined.
TIMER
INTERRUPT
POWER SAVER
ON / OFF
PROOF COPY
STOP / CLEAR
START PRINT
6 - 12
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Lens Mode
Automatic Paper Selection (APS)
APS detects the size of originals placed on RADF or the platen glass, and automatically
selects and feeds the copy paper of the same size as the original in 1:1 mode or of the
appropriate size when magnification ratio is selected at that time.
If the copy paper of the automatically selected size is not loaded in any tray, no copying
will be made, and the message requesting to load the paper of that size will be displayed.
❒ The sizes of originals which can be detected are: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*
❒ Incompatible: AMS
NOTE:
*: A5 original is available in both landscape (
) and portrait ( ) orientation. (RADF)
) orientation. (Platen glass)
A5 original is available in landscape (
The relation of original size, magnification ratio and copy paper size is listed below.
6
Basic
Operation
Original size
0.33 - 0.42
0.43 - 0.50
0.51 - 0.55
0.56 - 0.57
0.58 - 0.61
0.62 - 0.71
0.72 - 0.78
0.79 - 0.82
0.83 - 0.86
0.87 - 0.90
0.91 - 1.00
1.01 - 1.10
1.11 - 1.15
1.16 - 1.22
1.23 - 1.41
1.42 - 1.63
1.64 - 1.73
1.74 - 2.00
2.01 - 4.00
A3
B6
A5
B5R
A4R
B4
B4
B6
F4
A4R
A4
Paper size
B5R
B5
A5R
A5
B6
B6
A5
B5R
A4R
B6
B6
B6
B6
A5
A5
A5
B5R
B5
A4R
A4R
B5R
A5
A5
B5R
B5
A4R
A4R
B6
A4R
B4
F4
B4
B4
A3
A3
A3
A3
A3
B4
A3
A5
A5
B5R
B5
A4R
A4
B4
A3
A3
A3
0.33 - 0.42
0.43 - 0.50
0.51 - 0.55
0.56 - 0.57
0.58 - 0.61
0.62 - 0.71
0.72 - 0.78
0.79 - 0.82
0.83 - 0.86
0.87 - 0.90
0.91 - 1.00
1.01 - 1.10
1.11 - 1.15
1.16 - 1.22
1.23 - 1.41
1.42 - 1.63
1.64 - 1.73
1.74 - 2.00
2.01 - 4.00
Copy Density
Lens Mode
Magnification ratio
Magnification ratio
Paper size
6 - 13
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Lens Mode (continued)
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS)
AMS functions in the Initial setting when Paper Size is selected manually.
❒ Incompatible: APS, Change magnification, Program job, Dual page, Non-image area
erase, Repeat, AUTO layout, Overlay
An appropriate reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically and applied
to the image on the paper size. AMS automatically calculates and selects the correct ratio.
AMS ratios are shown in the table below.
Paper size
Original size
A3
B4
F4
A4R
B5R
A4
B5
A5*
A3
1.00
1.15
1.27
1.41
1.63
1.00
1.15
2.00
B4
0.86
1.00
1.10
1.22
1.41
0.86
1.00
1.73
F4
0.71
0.82
1.00
1.00
1.15
0.71
0.82
1.41
A4R
0.71
0.82
0.90
1.00
1.15
0.71 (1.00) 0.82 (1.15)
1.41
B5R
0.61
0.71
0.79
0.86
1.00
0.61 (0.86) 0.71 (1.00)
1.22
A4
0.50 (0.71) 0.58 (0.82) 0.64 (0.90) 0.71 (1.00) 0.82 (1.15)
1.00
1.15
1.00 (1.41)
B5
0.43 (0.61) 0.50 (0.71) 0.55 (0.79) 0.61 (0.86) 0.71 (1.00)
0.86
1.00
0.86 (1.22)
0.50
0.58
1.00
A5*
0.50
0.58
0.64
0.71
0.82
( ) is the magnificaton ratio of the Image rotation.
6 - 14
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Lens Mode (continued)
Preset and User Set Ratios
Use the Preset and User Set ratios to increase or decrease magnification in fixed amounts.
If required, the six initially set Preset ratios shown below can be adjusted in the Key
Operator mode. In addition, three User Set ratios are adjustable by the key operator. All
ratios remain effective until they are replaced.
Specifications for Preset and User Set Ratios
❒ 1:1 mode (no magnification)
❒ 6 Preset ratios: 0.71, 0.82, 0.86, 1.00, 1.55, 1.22 and 1.41
❒ 3 User Set ratios: Programmable by key operator and selected from 0.33~4.00
❒ To copy A4 originals to A4 copy paper, select A4 Paper Size, then select 1.00
magnification.
Procedure
1 Touch LENS MODE to enter the Magnification Selection Screen.
Full-Automatic Mode Screen
6
Basic
Operation
Magnification Selection Screen
Lens Mode
Basic Screen
2 Select the desired magnification. The selected key will be highlighted.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
To cancel the setting before returning to the Basic Screen, touch CANCEL.
To cancel the setting after returning to the Basic Screen, touch LENS MODE again,
select the desired ratio, then touch OK.
4 Position original(s) FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the document
feeder, as required.
5 When all settings are acceptable, press [START PRINT].
6 - 15
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Lens Mode (continued)
Zoom Mode
Use the Zoom mode to reduce or enlarge the copied original image in 1% increments.
❒ Zoom range: 0.33~4.00
Procedure
1 Touch LENS MODE to enter the Magnification Selection Screen.
2 Touch ZOOM to display the Zoom Screen.
Full-Automatic Mode Screen
Zoom Screen
Magnification Selection Screen
Basic Screen
3 Use keypad to enter a 3-digit zoom ratio, or use arrows to scroll to the desired ratio.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
To cancel the setting before returning to the Basic Screen, touch CANCEL.
To cancel the setting after returning to the Basic Screen, touch LENS MODE again,
and touch ZOOM to display the Zoom Screen. Select the desired ratio, then touch
OK.
5 Position original(s) FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the document
feeder, as required.
6 When all settings are acceptable, press [START PRINT].
6 - 16
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Lens Mode (continued)
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom
Use the Vertical/Horizontal zoom mode to reduce or enlarge vertical and horizontal
dimensions, independently.
❒ Vertical zoom range: 0.33~4.00
❒ Horizontal zoom range: 0.33~4.00
Width
Length
6
Basic
Operation
The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/Horizontal zoom.
Length: 0.50, Width: 0.50
Length: 0.50, Width: 1.00
Length: 0.50, Width: 2.00
Length: 0.50, Width: 4.00
Width
Length
Length: 1.00, Width: 0.50
Length: 1.00, Width: 1.00
Length: 1.00, Width: 2.00
Length: 1.00, Width: 4.00
Length: 2.00, Width: 0.50
Length:2.00, Width: 1.00
Length:2.00, Width: 2.00
Length: 2.00, Width: 4.00
Length: 4.00, Width: 0.50
Length: 4.00, Width: 1.00
Length: 4.00, Width: 2.00
Length: 4.00, Width: 4.00
6 - 17
Lens Mode
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Lens Mode (continued)
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom (continued)
Procedure
1 Touch LENS MODE to enter the Magnification Selection Screen.
2 Touch Vert/Horiz Zoom to display the Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Screen.
Full-Automatic Mode Screen
Magnification Selection Screen
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Screen
Basic Screen
3 Touch the Vertical arrow key to select a vertical ratio.
4 Use keypad to enter a 3-digit vertical zoom ratio, or use arrows to scroll to the desired
ratio.
5 Touch the Horizontal arrow key to select a horizontal ratio.
6 Use keypad to enter a 3-digit horizontal zoom ratio, or use arrows to scroll to the
desired ratio.
7 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
To cancel the setting before returning to Basic Screen, touch CANCEL.
To cancel the setting after returning to the Basic Screen, touch LENS MODE again,
and touch Vert/Horiz Zoom to display the Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Screen. Select
the desired ratio, then touch OK.
8 Position original(s) FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the document
feeder, as required.
9 When all settings are acceptable, press [START PRINT].
6 - 18
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Paper Size
Paper size is used to display the Paper Tray Selection Screen, or reset APS, or select a
specific paper tray. When a specific tray is selected, the paper size may require a ratio
adjustment. When using the RADF with Initial settings, a ratio will be selected automatically.
Tray locations correspond to main body & LCT (trays 1, 2, 3, 4, 5). Paper types, such as
BLUE, RED, BRWN, CHLR, HEAD, GREN, YELL, RECY, may be specified on some
trays by the key operator for information only, but paper types cannot be detected by the
machine.
Paper size Specifications
❒ When a selected tray is empty an out-of paper icon will flash on the Paper Tray Selection,
along with a message to load paper in the empty tray.
❒ When a tray is empty, but not selected or in use, the out-of paper icon will appear, but
will not flash in the message area.
❒ If a tray size is changed by the service centre, the new paper size will be reflected on
the screen, automatically.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions with AMS: APS, change magnification
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions with AMS: None
❒ Incompatible Applications with AMS: Dual page, Program job, Non-image area erase,
Repeat, AUTO layout, Overlay
Procedure
1 Touch PAPER SIZE to display the Paper Tray Selection Screen.
Basic Screen
6
Basic
Operation
Lens Mode
Paper Tray Selection Screen
Paper Size
2 Touch APS, or select a specific paper tray.
3 When the desired selection is highlighted, touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
To cancel the setting before returning to the Basic Screen, touch CANCEL.
To cancel the setting after returning to the Basic Screen, touch PAPER SIZE again,
select the desired paper tray, then touch OK.
4 Position original(s) FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the document
feeder, as required.
5 When all settings are acceptable, press [START PRINT] from the Basic Screen.
NOTE:
It is not possible to select the paper type (Thick, Thin or OHP) directly from the Paper Tray
Selection Screen. Paper type must be selected from the Applications Selection Screen, which can
be accessed by pressing the [APPLICATIONS] on the control panel.
6 - 19
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Reserve
The Reserve function allows you to start printing the next job immediately after the present
job is completed. While the first job is printing, you can set up the next job so that the
copier reads in the original image(s) and waits until the first printing is completed.
This section describes the procedure of this function and troubleshooting during the reserve
job setting.
Reserve Specifications
❒ Job settings : 2 (output job and one reserve job)
❒ Job No.
: 1 to 15
The Job No. assigned to each job will remain until the copier power is
turned off, whether all output jobs are completed or not.
When the Job No. reaches 16, the numbering will return to No. 1 from
the next job assigned to the copier.
❒ The reserve job is available to be set after the copier starts to scan for the output job.
❒ If certain conditions occur while a Reserve job is being set, such as activation of Interrupt
mode, mishandled paper, or depletion of paper, the current output job will cease and
the SETTING indicator on the screen will be replaced by INTERRUPT, JAM or ADD
PAPER, as appropriate. Perform the required measure for the situation at hand.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copy Conditions: Interrupt copying, Scanning in Memory copy, Proof
copy
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very High)
❒ Incompatible Applications: Overlay
Set Reserve Job
Procedure
1 The reserve job setting is available when the RESERVE indication on the Basic
Screen appears clear.
Basic Screen: reserve job available
6 - 20
Reserve Setting Screen
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Reserve (continued)
Set Reserve Job (continued)
2 Touch RESERVE to display the Reserve Setting Screen.
3 Set the desired copying conditions.
When the Reserve Setting Screen is displayed, all keys on the LCD and control
panel will function for the reserve setting job.
• When using Platen memory, set the original(s) on the platen glass or RADF, then press
[STORE] to store the image.
• When 1-2, 2-2, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image insert, or Book copy is selected,
set the original(s) on the platen glass or RADF, then press [START PRINT] to store the
image.
When all reserve job settings are made, release the reserve job setting function (see
note) by pressing [AUTO RESET] while the Reserve Setting Screen is displayed,
then touch SETTING. The Basic Screen will resume for the job in progress.
NOTE:
When releasing the reserve job setting function be sure to press [AUTO RESET] before touching
SETTING; otherwise you will be returned to the Basic Screen, not the Basic Screen for the job in
progress.
6
Basic
Operation
4 When output job is completed with the reserve job set, the Basic Screen will display
the copying conditions of the reserve job.
NOTE:
You can continue to set reserve job or store the image when output job is completed.
5 Press [START PRINT].
Copying on the reserve job will start.
Reserve/
Status
6 - 21
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Reserve (continued)
Troubleshooting in Reserve Setting
Mishandled Paper During the Reserve Setting
If a misfeed occurs with the job in progress while you are setting a Reserve job, the
SETTING indicator on the screen will change to JAM.
Basic Screen
If originals in the Reserve job are already scanned when the misfeed occurs, the Reserve
job will be performed after the jam is cleared and the cleared job is completed.
Procedure
1 Touch JAM to display the Jam Position Screen.
2 To view Help Screen instructions, touch GUIDE and remove paper/original.
3 Press [START PRINT]. The output job will be reprocessed.
4 Touch SETTING to continue setting the reserve job.
If scanning is not completed when the misfeed occurs, but Reserve settings were already
made, the Reserve job can be performed after the cleared job is completed. Simply insert
the original document and press [START PRINT].
6 - 22
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Reserve (continued)
Troubleshooting in Reserve Setting (continued)
When Paper is Depleted for the Job in Progress
If the paper supply for a job in progress becomes depleted while you are setting a Reserve
job, the SETTING indicator on the screen will change to ADD PAPER (blinking).
Basic Screen
6
Basic
Operation
In this case, you can still continue the reserve job setting.
Procedure
1 Touch ADD PAPER to display the Basic Screen for the output job.
2 Confirm the empty tray and supply the paper.
3 Press [START PRINT]. The output job will be reprocessed.
4 Touch SETTING to continue setting the reserve job.
Reserve/
Status
6 - 23
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Status
Touch the STATUS key on the Basic Screen to display the Job Status Screen (see below).
This screen allows you to confirm machine status for a variety of settings and conditions.
Each field is explained in the next page.
Touch respective keys on the Job Status Screen to display the following subsequent
screens.
❒ User Name Check Screen: Displays user name assigned to the jobs.
NOTE:
User name cannot be assigned to copying jobs.
❒ Previous Job List Screen: Lists 5 completed jobs going back from the current job.
❒ Non Complete Job List Screen: Lists the last 5 jobs which could not be printed in printer
mode.
Basic Screen
User Name Check Screen
Job Status Screen
Previous Job List Screen
Non Complete Job List Screen
Procedure
1 Touch STATUS on the Basic Screen.
2 The Job Status Screen displays to show the current machine status.
• To check user name of the job, touch USER NAME CHECK to display the User
Name Check Screen. Touch EXIT to return to the Job Status Screen.
• To view the previous job list, touch PREVIOUS JOB LIST to display the Previous
Job List Screen. Touch EXIT to return to the Job Status Screen.
• To view the jobs which could not be completed in printer mode, touch NON
COMPLETE JOB LIST to display the Non Complete Job List Screen. Touch EXIT
to return to the Job Status Screen.
3 When status check is completed, touch SETTING. The Basic Screen will be restored.
6 - 24
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Status (continued)
JOB No. : Displays the No. (1-15) for each job assigned to the machine.
During an interrupt copying job, the interrupt icon [ ] will be displayed in
this field instead of the number.
MODE:
Displays the machine’s current mode of operation. Seven modes are listed
below.
COPIER
RESERVE COPIER
PRINTER
RESERVE PRINTER
CONTROLLER
INTERRUPT
STATUS: Displays the current status of the machine for each job.
[Indication]
[Meaning]
READY
WAITING
SCANNING
ERROR
PRINTING
NO PAPER
STOP
NEXT PRINT
: Ready to use in each mode
: Warming up in each mode
: Scanning original(s) in copy mode
: Error in each mode
: Printing in each mode
: No paper in copy/print mode
: Stop in each mode
: Waiting for the completion of the previous operation
in copy/print mode
INITIALIZING
: Initializing for controller
READY TO RESERVE : Ready to reserve
RECEIVING
: Receiving the data for controller
TOTAL PAGE(s):
Displays the number of scanned pages for each job. (0 to 9999)
PAGE(S) LEFT:
Displays the remaining copy count of the job.
0 to 9999 (The number exceeding 9999 will be displayed as 9999↑.)
Copy count = No. of scanned pages x Print quantity
MINUTE(S) TO GO: Displays the time (in minutes) required for completing the job.
Exceeding 999 minutes: 999↑
Shorter than 1 minute: <1
NOTE:
The time displayed is an approximation and may take slightly longer.
Other:
The following message will be displayed on the second bar when
the reserved job does not exist.
RESERVED JOB DOES NOT EXIST
6 - 25
6
Basic
Operation
Reserve/
Status
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Memory Copy
Memory copy allows you to scan multiple originals from the platen glass and/or RADF,
then set the desired copy conditions and output the complete set.
Platen Memory Copy
Use Platen memory copy for originals that cannot be fed through the document feeder
due to thickness, size or condition.
When scanning thick originals that require keeping the document cover open, select Nonimage area erase to prevent exposure of the glass area around the border of the original.
This feature ensures a clean copy result and reduces toner consumption. The Non-image
area erase mode automatically releases after the original for which it is selected is scanned.
Additional images may be scanned.
Specifications for Platen Memory Copy
❒ Memory is available to store up to 1,500 pages (with maximum memory fitted) unless
memory overflow occurs.
❒ Incompatible Basic copying conditions: None
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning conditions: None
❒ Incompatible Applications: Image insert, Dual page
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
START PRINT
STORE
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Make required copying selection, and select 1s1 or 1s2 copy mode.
2 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection Screen,
touch MEMORY to highlight it, then touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. The LED
of the [STORE] key will be illuminated.
Application Selection Screen
Control Panel
TA
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
6 - 26
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Memory Copy (continued)
Platen Memory Copy (continued)
2
Place/Scan Originals on the Platen Glass ... FACE DOWN
1 Open the document feeder.
2 Place original FACE DOWN on the platen glass, then
close the document feeder.
IMPORTANT:
PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN REGULAR
ORDER OF PAGINATION.
3 Press [STORE] to scan and store the data into memory.
When pressing [STORE] does not start scanning, press
[STORE] to light the LED then press [STORE].
4 Repeat Steps 1 and 3 until all originals are scanned.
The number of originals scanned should not exceed the
Exit tray or Finisher capacity.
TA
6
Basic
Operation
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
CHECK
APPLICATION
JOB ME
ROTATION OFF
AUTO R
STORE
3
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using the keypad.
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
Memory Copy
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
START
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT]. The copier starts the printing job.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
while the paper is exiting; otherwise, mishandled paper
will occur.
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
6 - 27
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Memory Copy (continued)
RADF Memory Copy
Use this feature to scan more than 50 original into memory from the RADF. Use this
function in conjunction with the Reserve function to increase efficiency of the copying job.
Specifications for RADF Memory Copy
❒ Memory is available to store up to 1,500 pages (with maximum memory fitted) unless
memory overflow occurs.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: None
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high)
❒ Incompatible Applications: Image insert, Dual page
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
START PRINT
STORE
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
Make required copying selection.
2
Place/Scan Originals ... FACE UP
1 Position originals FACE UP on RADF.
If the number of originals exceeds 50, divide them into blocks not exceeding 50
sheets and load them from the block with the first page.
1~50
51~100
50
FACE UP
100
7
56
34
12
7
56
34
51 2
...
...
...
1451~1500
1500
7
56
34
1451 2
...
6 - 28
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Memory Copy (continued)
RADF Memory Copy (continued)
2
3
4
5
Press [STORE] to scan and store the data into memory.
Load the next 50 originals FACE UP on the RADF.
Press [STORE] to scan and store the data into memory.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the originals are stored.
TA
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
3
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using the keypad.
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
6
Basic
Operation
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT]. The copier starts the printing job.
CAUTION
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded
due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
while the paper is exiting; otherwise, mishandled paper
will occur.
Memory Copy
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
6 - 29
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher
This section describes three output modes for a copier without the Finisher. For the copier
with Finisher installed, refer to p. 7-2 ~ p. 7-19.
q Sort with normal exit (default)
w Sort with alternate exit
e Group with normal exit
Specifications of Sort with Alternate Exit
❒ Not available for the copier with Finisher
❒ A4, A4R, B5 and B5R, or 8.5"x11" and 8.5"x11"R paper should be loaded in any tray
including Multi-sheet bypass tray.
❒ Use RADF, or operate Memory copy to use platen glass.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: ATS, Tandem mode
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP
interleave, Image insert, Dual page, Program job, Non-Image area erase, Repeat image,
AUTO layout, Thin/Thick paper, Overlay
Originals
3 21
Sort with normal exit (default)
6 - 30
Sort with alternate exit
Group with normal exit
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
STAPLE SORT
STAPLE SORT
STAPLE SORT
SORT
SORT
SORT
Copy paper:
A4 and A4R, B5 and B5R
8.5"x11" and 8.5"x11"R
Touch GROUP on Output
Mode Screen
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Select desired Application functions and Basic copying settings.
2 Return to the Basic Screen.
3 To select Sort with alternate exit, press [SORT] to
illuminate the LED next to the key.
OUTPUT
STAPLE SORT
SORT
To select Group with normal exit, press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen,
and touch GROUP to illuminate the LED next to the key.
6
Basic
Operation
Output Mode Screen
Control Panel
OUTPUT
STAPLE SORT
SORT
To use Sort with normal exit, do not press any output key. No output LED should be
illuminated.
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
6 - 31
Output without
Finisher
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)
3
Position Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
... FACE DOWN on the Platen Glass
Position originals FACE UP in the document
feeder.
When using the platen glass and Sort with alternate exit,
activate Platen memory. First, position original FACE
DOWN on the platen glass, then press [STORE] to scan.
Repeat this operation for all originals.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
CAUTION
PROOF COPY
When the paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the
print quantity selected, remove the copied sets while the
paper is exiting; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
6 - 32
START PRINT
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Rotation
This function allows you to utilize APS or AMS and copy the original size documents
described below onto size A4 or B5, irrespective of the copy paper loading direction. By
default, Rotation requires APS or AMS to function; however, the key operator may set the
function to always function or when APS, AMS or reduce magnification functions. See p.
12-42 to p. 12-46.
Rotation Specifications
❒ Rotation copying uses memory.
❒ Paper size: A4, A4R, B5, B5R
❒ RADF APS detects size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, 8.5"x11"
❒ Platen APS detects size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*2
❒ Incompatible Basic copying conditions: V/H zoom, Tandem mode
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high)
❒ Incompatible Applications: Dual page, Program job, Non-image area erase, Repeat,
Auto layout, Overlay
NOTE:
*1: A5 original is available in both landscape (
) and portrait (
*2: A5 original is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
) orientation.
6
Basic
Operation
Rotation and APS
In APS with Rotation, the copier automatically makes a copy onto the same size paper as
the original loaded on the RADF or the platen glass, irrespective of the loading direction
of the original and the copy paper.
For example, when size A4 copy paper is loaded landscape in the tray and the copier
detects that the original is placed portrait, Rotation and APS function together to rotate the
original image by 90° and output the A4 copy to match the orientation of the copy paper.
Original
Copy paper
Rotation and APS
Output without
Finisher
APS cannot be
used alone.
Rotation
Similarly, when size A4 copy paper is loaded portrait in the tray and the copier detects that
the original is placed landscape, Rotation and APS function together to rotate the original
image by 90° and output the A4 copy to match the orientation of the copy paper.
Original
Copy paper
Rotation and APS
APS cannot be
used alone.
6 - 33
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Rotation (continued)
Rotation and AMS
For example, when size A4 copy paper is loaded landscape in the tray and copier detects
that the original is placed portrait, Rotation (if required) rotates the original image by 90°
and the copy is made with the appropriate AMS ratio to fit the portrait style of the copy
paper.
Original
Copy paper
Rotation and AMS
AMS only
Similarly, when size A4 copy paper is loaded in the tray vertically and the copier detects
that the original is placed horizontally, Rotation (if required) rotates the original image by
90° and the copy is made with the appropriate AMS ratio to fit the landscape style of the
copy paper.
Original
Copy paper
Rotation and AMS
AMS only
When the B5 tray is selected and the copier detects that the original is placed vertically,
Rotation rotates the original image by 90° and the copy is made with the appropriate AMS
ratio to fit the portrait style of the copy paper.
Original
6 - 34
Copy paper
Rotation and AMS
AMS only
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Rotation (continued)
To Release Automatic Rotation
The copier is initially set to activate the Rotation function automatically.
To release automatic Rotation:
Press [ROTATION OFF] to light the [ROTATION OFF] LED.
The Rotation function will be cancelled.
TA
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
To resume automatic Rotation:
Press [ROTATION OFF] to cancel the Rotation Off mode. The [ROTATION OFF] LED
will go off and the Rotation function will be reactivated.
6
Basic
Operation
Rotation
6 - 35
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Check Mode and Proof Copy
Use the Check mode to confirm copying selections before pressing the [START PRINT]
key. The Check Screen allows you not only to view the current settings but to change or
release them directly from the Check mode.
In this mode, use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before copying multiple
copies. This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of the following
copying selections.
• Copying conditions using Memory copy
• Sheet/Cover insertion
• Chapter
• Combination
• Booklet
• Image insert
• Dual page
With Proof copy, all originals are scanned into memory, and only one set is output after
you press [PROOF COPY] key on the control panel or touch PROOF COPY key on the
Check Screen. After Proof copy, some copying condition keys may appear dimmed in the
Check Screen. As to the copying condition indicated on these dimmed keys, you cannot
change or release the selection.
When [START PRINT] key is pressed, the job resumes copying until the job is completed.
Specifications for Check Mode and Proof Copy
❒ All settings made can be viewed in the Check Screen.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions with Proof Copy: Group
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions with Proof Copy: Resolution (Very high)
❒ Incompatible Applications with Proof Copy: None
Procedure
1
Display Check Screen
1 Press [CHECK] on the control panel to display the Check Screen.
Control Panel
Check Screen
COPY
PRINTER
TANDEM
PRINT
ECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
CHECK
HELP
ROTATION OFF
JOB MEMORY
STORE
AUTO RESET
R
2 Verify the settings made for the current job.
6 - 36
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Check Mode and Proof Copy (continued)
2
Make a Proof Copy
1 If necessary, press [PROOF COPY] on the control panel or touch PROOF COPY on
the Check Screen to output a set of sample copy.
If only one copied set is needed and the sample set will do for it, press [STOP/
CLEAR] to delete the stored data.
Check Screen
Control Panel
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
6
ST
Basic
Operation
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
You cannot change the selection if the copying
condition key appears dimmed.
2 Touch EXIT (or press [CHECK]) to exit from the Check mode and return to the Basic
Screen.
6 - 37
Check Mode &
Proof Copy
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Check Mode and Proof Copy (continued)
3
Change/Release Settings
If you want to change or release any settings, follow the procedure below.
To change the settings:
1 Touch the desired copying condition key on the Check Screen to highlight it. The
dimmed CHANGE SETTING key will be clear.
NOTES:
• The key which cannot be highlighted shows that the copying condition cannot be changed from
the Check Screen.
• The following application functions cannot be changed even though highlighted, as the CHANGE
SETTING key will be kept dimmed: Overlay, Non-image area erase, Reverse image, AUTO
layout.
2 Touch CHANGE SETTING. The LCD will display an appropriate screen to change
the copying condition selected.
• Selecting a basic copying condition key will display the Basic Screen.
• Selecting Enhance key will display the Change Enhance Selection Screen.
• Selecting Non STD Size key will display the Non STD Size Setting Screen.
• Selecting an application function key will display the Change Application Selection
Screen.
Check Screen
Density Selection Screen
3 Change the setting as desired, then restore the Check Screen to return to the checking
steps, or to the Basic Screen to start copying.
6 - 38
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Check Mode and Proof Copy (continued)
To release the settings:
1 Touch the desired original scanning condition key or application function key on the
Check Screen to highlight it. The dimmed RELEASE SETTING key will be clear.
2 Touch RELEASE SETTING.
Check Screen
6
Basic
Operation
3 Touch YES to cancel the application function, or NO to restore.
When YES is touched, the selected function will be released and the key will disappear
from the Check Screen.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT] when the Basic Screen is displayed.
If set quantity is two or more, the copier will output the rest
except the sample sets.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
Check Mode &
Proof Copy
6 - 39
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Interrupt Mode
Use the Interrupt mode to interrupt copying in progress to perform a simple job. When
interrupt copying is completed, the settings for the initial job restore automatically and the
Basic Screen displays. Press the [INTERRUPT] key when the copier is in the following
conditions:
• Printing continuously the image stored in the memory
• Scanning the originals into memory
• Scanning the originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode
Specifications for Interrupt Mode
❒ Incompatible Basic copying conditions: Reserve
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Condition: Resolution (Very high)
❒ Incompatible Applications: None
Procedure
1
Press INTERRUPT Button
To stop the current copying job, press [INTERRUPT]. For
particular jobs in progress, copying will cease only after
certain phases of the immediate operation are completed,
as indicated by LED conditions described below.
• Collectively printing image stored in memory
The [INTERRUPT] LED blinks until one set of the current
job is printed. Then the LED remains steady for the
temporary job performed in Interrupt mode.
• Scanning originals into memory
The [INTERRUPT] LED blinks until scanning is completed
for all originals placed in the document feeder. Then, the
LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in
Interrupt mode.
• Scanning originals into memory while printing in Reserve
mode (see Note 1)
The [INTERRUPT] LED blinks until the copier completes
the current printing job, scans all originals placed on the
document feeder, and prints one set of the Reserved
job. The LED remains steady for the temporary job
performed in Interrupt mode.
The SETTING indicator on the Basic Screen will change
to INTERRUPT.
Basic Screen
6 - 40
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
Basic Screen in Interrupt Mode
START PRINT
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Interrupt Mode (continued)
2
Replace Originals/Set Copying Conditions
1 Remove any document from the platen glass or from the document feeder, if present.
2 Place new original(s) on the platen glass or in the document feeder.
6
3 The copying settings in Interrupt mode are as follows.
Copy Mode
RADF
AE
Lens Mode
APS
Print Quantity
Output Mode
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Basic
Operation
1s1
ON
ON
1:1
ON
1
Non-sort
Select other copying features that are compatible with the Interrupt mode, if desired.
3
Start Interrupt Copying
Press [START PRINT].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
4
Press INTERRUPT Button Again
When Interrupt copying is completed, press [INTERRUPT] again to return to the settings
of the initial job.
5
Resume Copying
Press [START PRINT] to resume copying, or load the next batch of originals if RADF
memory copying.
NOTES:
1 In Reserve mode, pressing [INTERRUPT] before the copier finishes scanning originals of the
reserve job will clear the settings selected for reserve job.
2 When [CHECK] is pressed during Interrupt Copying, the information displayed reflects the
initial copy job settings. Check mode will not display Interrupt copy job information.
6 - 41
Interrupt Mode
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Help Mode
Use the [HELP] key to access information about the current screen mode and to learn
about setting procedures. The [HELP] key can be pressed from any screen except Job
Memory and Key Operator Screens.
The Help Screen also includes the Help menu icon in the lower left of the Help Screen.
When touched, the Help Menu Screen displays a list of all of the copier functions. When
a function item is touched, the Help Screen displays information specific to that topic.
Control panel
contrast key
Control Panel
Help Screen
Weekly timer key
COPY
PRINTER
TANDEM
PRINT
ECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
CHECK
HELP
ROTATION OFF
JOB MEMORY
STORE
AUTO RESET
R
Service call icon
Help Menu Screen
Procedure
1 While in any screen, press [HELP] to display the Help Screen.
2 Touch TONER, PAPERs, RADF, STAPLE, FOR ASSISTANCE, or the Service call
icon to display specific Help information.
3 For help on operations, touch HELP MENU in the lower left area of the screen. The
Help Menu Screen will be displayed. Select one of the 6 Help menu items.
4 If the Control panel contrast key is displayed, you can display the Contrast Adjustment
Screen and adjust the panel contrast. See p. 12-29 for operation. (See note.)
5 The Weekly timer key display only when the Weekly timer system is activated. Touch
the key to display the settings of the Weekly timer.
6 Touch EXIT to return to the screen that was displayed before pressing [HELP].
NOTE:
The control panel contrast feature can be adjusted from the Help Screen provided the feature
setting is activated by Service. Contact your service centre if the feature is required.
6 - 42
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Using the Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
The Multi-sheet bypass tray can be used to stack regular 60 ~ 90g/m2 paper, or it can be
used in the single-sheet mode to copy 50g/m2 thin stock or 170g/m2 thick stock.
Specifications for Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
❒ Bypass tray paper size: A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, B6*
❒ Bypass tray paper weight range: 50 ~ 170g/m2
❒ Bypass tray capacity: Plain paper (80g/m2); max. 100 sheets
OHP film; 1 sheet only
NOTE:
*: A5 and B6 originals are available in landscape orientation (
) only.
Procedure
1
6
Load Copy Paper
1 Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray located on the right
side of the copier.
Basic
Operation
2 When copying onto thick or thin stock, select the Thin/
Thick paper of the Application mode, then enter Print
quantity and make other compatible copying selections,
as required.
When selecting the OHP interleave of the Application
mode to copy onto OHP film, print quantity is automatically
set to 1.
3 Insert copy paper while adjusting the paper guides to the
paper size.
Insert OHP film one sheet at a time; or, stack paper, up
to 100 sheets 80g/m2.
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
Help Mode
Multi-sheet
Bypass Tray
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
6 - 43
Section 6 : Basic Operations
Using the Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray (continued)
3
Select Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
Touch PAPER SIZE to display the Paper Tray Selection Screen, and touch the Bypass
key to highlight it.
Full-Automatic Mode Screen
Paper Tray Selection Screen
4
Position Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
... FACE DOWN on the Platen Glass
Place originals FACE UP on the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
5
Start Copying
1 Press [START PRINT].
2 When copying is completed, close the Multi-sheet bypass
tray, then press [AUTO RESET] to restore settings.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
6 - 44
START PRINT
Section 7: Output Modes
FS-106 Finisher Specifications
FS-108BM Finisher Specifications
Non-Sort Mode Using Primary (Main) Tray
Sort Mode Using Primary (Main) Tray
Staple-Sort Mode Using Primary (Main) Tray
Group Mode Using Primary (Main) Tray
Output Modes Using Secondary (Sub) Tray
Folding and Stapling & Folding Modes Using Booklet Tray (FS-108BM)
Cover Sheet Feeder (FS-108BM with PI-108)
Manual Stapling (FS-108BM)
7
Output
Modes
Finisher
Specifications
Non-Sort
Sort
Staple-Sort
Group
Secondary
Tray
Folding/Stapling
& Folding
Cover Sheet
Feeder
Manual
Stapling
Section 7 : Output Modes
FS-106 Finisher Specifications
Use only paper that is recommended by Konica and stored under the environmental
conditions stated for copy quantity.
Special stock is not guaranteed for reliability or copy quality. Multi-sheet bypass tray,
Interrupt, and OHP interleaving are incompatible with finisher use.
Finisher Type
❒ Primary (Main) Tray with twin staple heads: moving tray type
Secondary (Sub) Tray
Primary (Main) Tray
• Non-Sort Mode
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, B6*1, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper weight: 60~90g/m2; Special stock (50~59g/m2, 91~170g/m2, OHP film, labels,
hole punch, rag content)
❒ Paper capacity for 80g/m2: 500 sheets A5*1, B6*1
2,000 sheets A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
1,500 sheets A3, B4, F4
• Sort Mode/Group Mode
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper weight: 60~90g/m2
❒ Paper capacity for 80g/m2: 500 sheets A5*1
2,000 sheets A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
1,500 sheets A3, B4, F4
• Staple-Sort Mode
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper weight: 60~90g/m2
❒ Paper capacity for 80g/m2: 1,000 sheets*2
❒ Staple capacity: 50 sheets*3 (5.0mm thick or less)
❒ Staple position: See p. 7-8.
Secondary (Sub) Tray
• Non-sort and face down exit
• Non-sort and face up exit
• Group and face down exit
• Group and face up exit
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, B6*1, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper weight: 60~90g/m2; Special stock (50~59g/m2, 91~170g/m2)
❒ Paper capacity for 80g/m2: 200 sheets
NOTES:
*1: A5 or B6 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
*2: Variable according to the number of pages to be stapled. See p. 4-7 for detail.
*3: Staple sheet capacity is changeable, and may be set to 45, 40 or 35 by service.
7-2
Section 7 : Output Modes
FS-108BM Finisher Specifications
Use only paper that is recommended by Konica and stored under the environmental
conditions stated for copy quantity.
Special stock is not guaranteed for reliability or copy quality. Multi-sheet bypass tray,
Interrupt, and OHP interleaving are incompatible with finisher use.
Finisher Type
❒ Primary (Main) Tray with twin staple heads: moving tray type
Secondary (Sub) Tray
Booklet Tray
Cover Sheet Feeder PI-108 (option)
Primary (Main) Tray
• Non-Sort Mode
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, B6*1, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper weight: 60~90g/m2; Special stock (50~59g/m2, 91~170g/m2, OHP film, labels,
hole punch, rag content)
❒ Paper capacity for 80g/m2: 500 sheets A5*1, B6*1
3,000 sheets A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
1,500 sheets A3, B4, F4
• Sort Mode/Group Mode
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper weight: 60~90g/m2
❒ Paper capacity for 80g/m2: 500 sheets A5*1
3,000 sheets A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
1,500 sheets A3, B4, F4
• Staple-Sort Mode
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper weight: 60~90g/m2
❒ Paper capacity for 80g/m2: 1,000 sheets*2
❒ Staple capacity: 50 sheets*3 (5.0mm thick or less)
❒ Staple position: See p. 7-9.
Secondary (Sub) Tray
• Non-sort and face down exit
• Non-sort and face up exit
• Group and face down exit
• Group and face up exit
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, B6*1, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper weight: 60~90g/m2; Special stock (50~59g/m2, 91~170g/m2)
❒ Paper capacity for 80g/m2: 200 sheets
NOTES:
*1: A5 or B6 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
*2: Variable according to the number of pages to be stapled. See p. 4-8 for detail.
*3: Staple sheet capacity is changeable, and may be set to 45, 40 or 35 by service.
7-3
7
Output
Modes
Finisher
Specifications
Section 7 : Output Modes
FS-108BM Finisher Specifications (continued)
Booklet Tray
• Folding Mode
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 8.5"x11"R
❒ Paper weight: 60~90g/m2; Special stock (80g/m2 paper is recommended)
❒ Number of Folding sheet: 3 sheets max.
❒ Booklet tray capacity: Approx. 100 sheets max.
33 sets max. of 3-sheet-folded booklet
(33 x 3 = 99 sheets)
50 sets max. of 2-sheet-folded booklet
(50 x 2 = 100 sheets)
•
❒
❒
❒
Stapling & Folding Mode
Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 8.5"x11"R
Paper weight: 60~90g/m2; Special stock (80g/m2 paper is recommended)
Number of Folding sheet: 16 sheets max. (using 80g/m2 paper only)
15 sheets max. (using one cover paper)
❒ Booklet tray capacity: Approx. 100 sheets max.
20 sets max. of 5-sheet-folded booklet
(20 x 5 = 100 sheets)
10 sets max. of 10-sheet-folded booklet
(10 x 10 = 100 sheets)
6 sets max. of 16-sheet-folded booklet
(6 x 16 = 96 sheets)
Cover Sheet Feeder
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5, A5*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Cover paper weight: 50~200g/m2 paper
NOTES:
* : A5 paper is available to the manual stapling only.
7-4
Section 7 : Output Modes
Non-Sort Mode Using Primary (Main) Tray
The Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are not selected.
Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted sets.
With the Primary (main) tray initially selected on the Output Mode Screen, FS-106/FS108BM outputs the printed sheets FACE DOWN in the proper order.
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, B6*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper capacity for 80g/m2: 500 sheets A5*, B6*
2,000 sheets A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
(FS-106)
3,000 sheets A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
(FS-108BM)
1,500 sheets A3, B4, F4
NOTES:
*: A5 or B6 paper is available in landscape orientation (
1
2
) only.
3
7
OUTPUT
Go out
1
2
Output
Modes
3
STAPLE SORT
Finisher
Specifications
SORT
Non-Sort
Procedure
1 To use the Non-sort mode, be sure the Output, Staple-sort, and Sort indicator lights,
located above each key, are off.
2 Enter the desired print quantity.
3 Position original(s) in the document feeder or on the platen glass, and make copying
selections, as required.
4 Press [START PRINT] to begin copying in Non-sort mode.
Copies will exit face down, with the page heading toward the front of the copier.
CAUTION:
When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the
copied sets while the paper is exiting; otherwise mishandled paper will occur.
7-5
Section 7 : Output Modes
Sort Mode Using Primary (Main) Tray
Use this mode when you want to output multiple copies of the original set, and have each
sorted set offset upon exit. The staple mode can be selected with the sort mode.
With the Primary (main) tray initially selected on the Output Mode Screen, FS-106/FS108BM outputs the printed sheets FACE DOWN in the proper order.
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper capacity for 80g/m2: 500 sheets A5
2,000 sheets A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
(FS-106)
3,000 sheets A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
(FS-108BM)
1,500 sheets A3, B4, F4
NOTES:
*: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
1
2
) only.
3
OUTPUT
1
2
3
STAPLE SORT
Light
30mm
SORT
Procedure
1 Press [SORT] to select and illuminate the Sort mode.
2 Enter the desired print quantity.
3 Position originals in the document feeder, and make copying selections as required.
When using Memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder or on the platen
glass, and press [STORE] to scan. See p. 6-26 to p. 6-29.
4 Press [START PRINT] .
CAUTION:
When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the
copied sets while the paper is exiting; otherwise mishandled paper will occur.
7-6
Section 7 : Output Modes
Staple-Sort Mode Using Primary (Main) Tray
Use this mode when you want to offset and staple each copied set. Stapling position and
number of staples (1 or 2) can be designated on the Staple Position Selection Screen,
which is a subsequent screen of the Output Mode Screen.
Each finished set will be offset from the next copied set.
With the Primary (main) tray initially selected on the Output Mode Screen, FS-106/FS108BM outputs the printed sheets FACE DOWN in the proper order.
❒ Stapled paper at 1 position: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" (B5R cannot
be stapled.)
❒ Stapled paper at 2 positions: A4 or 8.5"x11" paper is available in both landscape ( )
and portrait ( ) orientation.
B5 paper is available in portrait ( ) orientation only.
A3, B4 or F4 paper is available in landscape ( )
orientation only.
❒ Paper capacity for 80g/m2: 1,000 sheets (Variable according to the number of pages to
be stapled. See p. 4-7 or p. 4-8 for details.)
❒ Staple capacity: 50 sheets 80g/m2 (5.0mm thick or less)
(Staple capacity is changeable, and may be set to 45, 40, or 35 by service.)
❒ Staple position: 1 oblique staple; 1 parallel staple (FS-108BM only); 2 parallel staples
7
Output
Modes
3
2
3
2
3
3
2
Light
3
1
1
OUTPUT
3
2
1
3
2
3
2
3
2
1
1
1
Sort
Staple-Sort
STAPLE SORT
SORT
1 oblique staple
Basic Screen
1 parallel staple
2 parallel staples
Staple position icon
7-7
Section 7 : Output Modes
Staple-Sort Mode Using Primary (Main) Tray (continued)
Procedure
1 Press [STAPLE SORT] to select and illuminate the Staplesort mode. The Staple Position icon will be displayed on
the Basic Screen.
When not changing the staple position, proceed to step
7.
OUTPUT
STAPLE SORT
SORT
Output Mode Screen
7-8
Staple Position Selection Screen (FS-106)
Section 7 : Output Modes
Staple-Sort Mode Using Primary (Main) Tray (continued)
Output Mode Screen
Staple Position Selection Screen (FS-108BM)
7
Output
Modes
Staple-Sort
2 Press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen.
3 Touch STAPLE POSITION. The Staple Position Selection Screen will be displayed.
4 Touch the desired key among the eight keys on the screen to select the staple
position.
5 Touch OK on the Staple Position Selection Screen to return to the Output Mode
Screen.
6 Touch OK on the Output Mode Screen to complete the setting and return to the Basic
Screen.
The Output indicator light is on.
7-9
Section 7 : Output Modes
Staple-Sort Mode Using Primary (Main) Tray (continued)
7 Select additional copying features, as required.
8 Enter desired print quantity.
9 Position originals in the document feeder. When using Memory copy, position
original(s) in the document feeder or on the platen glass, and press [STORE] to scan.
See p. 6-26 to p. 6-29.
10 Press [START PRINT].
CAUTION:
When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the
copied sets while the paper is exiting; otherwise mishandled paper will occur.
7 - 10
Section 7 : Output Modes
Group Mode Using Primary (Main) Tray
Use this mode when you want to group together multiple copies of each original, and
offset the sets upon exit. Grouped sets cannot be stapled.
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper capacity for 80g/m2: 500 sheets A5*
2,000 sheets A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
(FS-106)
3,000 sheets A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
(FS-108BM)
1,500 sheets A3, B4, F4
(A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.)
Light
3
OUTPUT
2
3
2
1
1
STAPLE SORT
30mm
7
SORT
Output
Modes
Output Mode Screen (FS-106)
Output Mode Screen (FS-108BM)
Staple-Sort
Group
Procedure
1 Press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen.
2 Touch GROUP, then OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
The Output indicator light is on.
3 Enter the desired print quantity.
4 Position originals in the document feeder, and make copying selections as required.
When using Memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder or on the
platen glass, and press [STORE] to scan. See p. 6-26 to p. 6-29.
5 Press [START PRINT].
CAUTION:
When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the
copied sets while the paper is exiting; otherwise mishandled paper will occur.
7 - 11
Section 7 : Output Modes
Output Modes Using Secondary (Sub) Tray
In addition to the Primary (main) tray, Finisher FS-106/FS-108BM is equipped with a
Secondary (sub) tray that can be selected on the Output Mode Screen.
The Secondary (sub) tray provides 4 types of output mode as specified below, also to be
specified on the Output Mode Screen.
(1) Non-sort and face down exit
(2) Non-sort and face up exit
(3) Group and face down exit
(4) Group and face up exit
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, B6*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
*: A5 or B6 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
❒ Paper weight: 60~90g/m2, Special stock; 50~59g/m2, 91~170g/m2
❒ Paper capacity for 80g/m2: 200 sheets
Light
OUTPUT
STAPLE SORT
Select the Secondar
(sub) tray on the
Output Mode Screen
1
2
3
Set the print quantity
in 3 sets
SORT
Non-sort and
face down exit
Non-sort and
face up exit
Output Mode Screen (FS-106)
7 - 12
Group and
face down exit
Group and
face up exit
Output Mode Screen (FS-108BM)
Section 7 : Output Modes
Output Modes Using Scondary (Sub) Tray (continued)
Procedure
1 Press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen.
2 Touch SUB TRAY, then touch the desired key(s) on the screen to specify one of the
four output modes. To select Non-sort and face down exit, for example, simply touch
FACE DOWN; to select Group and face up exit, touch GROUP and FACE UP.
3 Touch OK on the Output Mode Screen to complete the setting and return to the Basic
Screen.
The Output indicator light is on.
4 Enter the desired print quantity.
5 Position originals in the document feeder, and make copying selections as required.
When using Memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder or on the
platen glass, and press [STORE] to scan. See p. 6-26 to p. 6-29.
6 Press [START PRINT].
CAUTION:
When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the
copied sets while the paper is exiting; otherwise mishandled paper will occur.
7
Output
Modes
Secondary
Tray
7 - 13
Section 7 : Output Modes
Folding and Stapling & Folding Modes Using Booklet Tray (FS-108BM)
The Folding and Stapling & Folding modes are available only when the FS-108BM finisher
option is installed. When either mode is selected, the Booklet feature is automatically
selected and indicated on the Application Selection Screen.
NOTES:
1. When copying two-sided signature originals using the Folding or Stapling & Folding mode,
release the automatically selected Booklet mode on the Application Selection Screen.
2. When copying dark originals or using Reverse Image mode together with Folding or Stapling
& Folding mode, the folded line of the output copies may be slightly shifted.
The following copy results may be expected when using Folding or Stapling & Folding
Modes:
In the Folding mode, each copied set is folded and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher.
In the Stapling & Folding mode, each copied set is stapled at two positions (saddle
stitched), then folded and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher.
❒ Use RADF.
❒ Max. number of folded sheets (80 g/m2 paper) in both modes:
Folding;
3 sheets (less than in Stapling & Folding mode because they are
not cinched first)
Stapling & Folding; 16 sheets
15 sheets when using thick cover paper
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 8.5"x11"R
❒ Paper weight: 60~90g/m2; Special stock (80g/m2 paper is recommended)
❒ Booklet tray capacity:
When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will stop operating. Select an
appropriate print quantity referring to the following capacity.
Approx. 100 sheets max.
Folding;
33 sets max. of 3-sheet-folded booklet (33 x 3 = 99 sheets)
Stapling & Folding; 20 sets max. of 5-sheet-folded booklet (20 x 5 = 100 sheets)
6 sets max. of 15-sheet-folded booklet (6 x 15 = 90 sheets)
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions with Booklet selected: APS, Sort, Staple-sort,
Group, Cover sheet feeding, 1s1, 2s1, Alternate exit
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions with Booklet selected: Resolution (Very high),
Mixed Original, Non STD size
❒ Incompatible Applications with Booklet selected: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination,
OHP Interleave, Program Job, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat, Frame/Fold Erasure,
AUTO Layout, Thin/Thick Paper, Shift mode in Image Shift, Overlay
❒ Incompatible conditions without Booklet: Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Alternate exit, Mixed
Original with APS, OHP Interleave, Program Job, Thick paper mode in Thin/Thick Paper
Stapling & Folding
Folding
3 sheets max.
7 - 14
16 sheets max.
15 sheets max. when using thick cover paper
Section 7 : Output Modes
Folding and Stapling & Folding Modes Using Booklet Tray
(FS-108BM) (continued)
Procedure
1 Close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].
2 Press [OUTPUT] on the control panel to display the Output Mode Screen, then touch
MAIN TRAY to highlight it.
Touch Stapling & Folding or Folding, as desired.
NOTE:
Selecting Folding or Stapling & Folding will automatically switch the output tray to Booklet tray.
Notice that the arrow pointing to the MAIN TRAY shifts to the Booklet tray.
3 Touch OK on the Output Mode Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored and the
Output indicator will light.
Control Panel
Output Mode Screen
OUTPUT
7
Output
Modes
STAPLE SORT
SORT
4 Select additional copying features, as required.
NO COVER SHEET of Booklet is automatically selected. To change this selection,
press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen, then touch Booklet
twice to display the Booklet Mode Selection Screen to make another selection or to
release the setting.
5 Enter the desired print quantity.
6 Position originals in the document feeder. When using Memory copy, position
original(s) in the document feeder or on the platen glass, and press [STORE] to scan.
See p. 6-26 to p. 6-29.
NOTE:
When loading originals, heed the following limits on capacity:
Folding mode
6 pages or less for simplex copying
12 pages or less for duplex copying
Stapling & Folding mode 32 pages or less for simplex copying
64 pages or less for duplex copying
Exceeding the above limits on capacity may cause trouble in the finisher.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to
return to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
7 Press [START PRINT].
CAUTION
When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will cease operating. To avoid
such trouble, select an appropriate print quantity from the specifications on p. 7-14.
7 - 15
Folding/Stapling
& Folding
Section 7 : Output Modes
Cover Sheet Feeder (FS-108BM with PI-108)
The Cover Sheet Feeder (PI-108) is available as an option on the FS-108BM finisher.
Load cover sheet paper into this device and use the sheets as front covers for copied sets
output to the Main tray; or use the sheets as booklet type covers for copied sets output to
the Booklet tray in the Folding or Stapling & Folding mode.
NOTES:
• Paper loaded into the cover sheet feeder cannot be copied.
• This function is incompatible with cover sheet mode (COVER WITH COPY SHEET and COVER
WITH BLANK SHEET) in Booklet and Thick paper mode in Sheet/Cover Insertion.
❒ Cover paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5, 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
(50~200 g/m2)
❒ Copy paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5, 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
(80 g/m2 paper recommended)
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Output to Sub tray, Alternate exit
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Mixed Original with APS
❒ Incompatible Applications: Thick paper mode in Sheet/Cover Insertion, Cover sheet
mode in Booklet
Cover sheet
Copied set with
cover attached
Copied sets with cover
attached in Folding or
Stapling & Folding mode
Procedure
1 Close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].
2 Press [OUTPUT] on the control panel to display the Output
Mode Screen.
OUTPUT
STAPLE SORT
SORT
7 - 16
Section 7 : Output Modes
Cover Sheet Feeder (FS-108BM with PI-108) (continued)
Output Mode Screen
Cover Sheet Insert Selection Screen
3 Touch MAIN TRAY to highlight it, and then touch COVER SHEET to display the Cover
Sheet Insert Selection Screen.
4 Touch FRONT, FRONT+BACK, or BACK to highlight it.
5 Touch OK on the Cover Sheet Insert Selection Screen. The Output Mode Screen will
be restored.
6 Touch OK on the Output Mode Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored and the
Output indicator will light.
7 Select additional copying features, as required.
8 Load the cover sheet paper into the optional cover sheet feeder of the FS-108BM
finisher.
If the paper size loaded in the cover sheet feeder is not suitable, the following messages
will be displayed and copying will be unavailable.
7
Output
Modes
Please load cover sheet in
cover sheet feeder
Adapt paper size between
cover sheet and selected paper
9 Enter the desired print quantity.
10 Position originals in the document feeder or on the platen glass.
Hint:
Cover Sheet
Feeder
When using Platen memory copy, position original(s) on the platen glass and press [STORE] to
scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
When using RADF memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder and press [STORE]
to scan. See p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to
return to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
11 Press [START PRINT].
CAUTION:
When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the
copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
7 - 17
Section 7 : Output Modes
Manual Stapling (FS-108BM)
The Manual Stapling function is available only with the Cover Sheet Feeder option (PI108) installed on the FS-108BM Finisher. To use this convenient function, simply place a
set of paper to be stapled into the cover sheet feeder of the finisher, select the desired
staple mode from the manual stapling control panel located on the top of the finisher, then
press the Staple Start/Stop button. The stapled set will be delivered to the Booklet tray or
the Primary (main) tray according to the selected mode, as described below.
• Stapling & Folding (2 staples in the center + Folding): Booklet tray
• 1 oblique staple: Main tray
• 2 parallel staples: Main tray
Specifications for Manual Stapling & Folding mode
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 8.5"x11"R
❒ Paper weight: 60~90g/m2 (80g/m2 paper is recommended)
❒ Staple capacity: 16 sheets max. (80g/m2 paper)
15 sheets max. (80g/m2 paper with a thick paper cover)
❒ Output tray: Booklet tray
Specifications for Manual Stapling 1 oblique staple and 2 parallel staples
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5, A5*, 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper weight: 60~90g/m2 (80g/m2 paper is recommended)
❒ Staple capacity: 50 sheets max. (80g/m2 paper)
❒ Output tray: Main tray
NOTE:
*: A5 paper is available in portrait orientation (
) only.
MAN
Stapling & Folding
Manual stapling control panel
1 oblique staple
2 parallel staples
7 - 18
Section 7 : Output Modes
Manual Stapling (FS-108BM) (continued)
Procedure
1 Place a set of paper to be stapled into the cover sheet
feeder, then align the guide plate. The indicator light of
Staple Start/Stop button will turn green.
NOTE:
Refer to the specifications on previous page for available paper
size in each mode.
2 Press Staple Mode Selection button to select the desired staple mode.
MANUAL OPERATION
7
Output
Modes
3 Press Staple Start/Stop button.
Stapled sheets will be delivered to the appropriate tray according to the selected
staple mode.
NOTE:
If you want to stop the manual stapling operation, press the Staple Start/Stop button again. The
finisher will cease operating. When using Stapling & Folding mode, the unfinished set will be left
in the stacker unit inside the finisher.
MANUAL OPERATION
Manual
Stapling
CAUTION
When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will cease operating. To avoid
such trouble, select an appropriate print quantity from the specifications on p. 7-14.
CAUTION:
When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the
copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
7 - 19
Section 8: Original Scanning Condition
Original Scanning Condition Menu
Resolution (High Quality)
High Mode
Very High Mode
Text/Photo Enhance
Original Variety
Mixed Original
Z-Folded Original
Original Form
Original Scanning
Condition Menu
Resolution
Text/Photo
Enhance
Mixed Original
Z-Folded
Original
Original Form
8
Scanning
Condition
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Original Scanning Condition Menu
When the [SPECIAL ORIGINAL] key is pressed, the Original Scanning Condition Screen
displays on the touch panel. If one function on the menu is incompatible with another, it
will appear dimmed.
The function keys initially selected for each of four sections are highlighted. Touch and
highlight the desired key to change the standard setting. Some function keys display
subsequent screen when touched.
When all settings are made for each function, the OK key can be touched to complete the
settings, and return you to the Basic Screen. With the Basic Screen displayed, you can
press [START PRINT] key to perform the operation.
To cancel the change before returning to the Basic Screen, touch CANCEL.
To recall the standard setting of the original scanning conditions, touch RECALL
STANDARD.
Original Scanning Condition Screen
Control Panel
TA
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
NOTES:
1. The indicator light on the [SPECIAL ORIGINAL] key will be lit when the original scanning
condition have been made.
2. When incompatible selections are made, the last key pressed will be selected.
8-2
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Resolution (High Quality)
Image quality in the normal default mode is adequate for most copying needs.
Special modes are available for jobs that require enhanced image quality, as for complex
text or graphic images, or high quality photos, etc.
High Mode
High Mode scans more detail from the original image than the normal mode, and uses
more memory than the normal default mode. Fewer originals can be copied at one time.
Specifications for High Mode
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: The copying conditions may not function with
some combination of copying conditions. Ask your Konica service centre.
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: None
❒ Incompatible Applications: None
Original Scanning
Condition Menu
Resolution
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [SPECIAL ORIGINAL] to display the Original Scanning Condition Screen.
2 Touch HIGH.
3 Select additional copying features, as desired.
8
Original Scanning Condition Screen
Control Panel
Scanning
Condition
TA
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
5 Make other compatible selections.
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
8-3
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Resolution (High Quality) (continued)
High Mode (continued)
3
Place Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
FACE DOWN on Platen Glass
Position original(s) in the document feeder or on the platen glass.
Hint:
When using the Platen memory copy, press [STORE] to illuminate the Memory copy mode. Position
original on the platen glass, and start scanning. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
When using the RADF memory copy, position originals in the document feeder, and start scanning.
See p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release
the mode and reset the machine.
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
8-4
START PRINT
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Resolution (High Quality) (continued)
Very High Mode
Very High resolution is used for high quality photo output, and uses no memory.
Specifications for Very High Mode
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Using RADF, Alternate exit, Sort, Staple-sort,
Folding/Stapling & Folding with Booklet, 1s2, 2s2, 2s1, RADF memory copy, Reserve,
Proof copy, Tandem mode
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Mixed original, Z-folded original
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP
interleave, Image insert, Dual page, Program job, Non-image area erase, Repeat, AUTO
layout, Thin/Thick paper, Image shift, Overlay
Resolution
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [SPECIAL ORIGINAL] to display the Original Scanning Condition Screen.
2 Touch VERY HIGH.
3 Select additional copying features, as desired.
Original Scanning Condition Screen
Control Panel
8
TA
Scanning
Condition
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
5 Make other compatible selections.
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter the desired print quantity.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
8-5
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Resolution (High Quality) (continued)
Very High Mode (continued)
3
Place Originals ... FACE DOWN on Platen Glass
Position original(s) on the platen glass.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release
the mode and reset the machine.
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
8-6
START PRINT
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Text/Photo Enhance
Text Mode
Use the Text mode when copying the text original. In this mode, text is improved in
comparison to using the general mode.
Photo Mode
Use the Photo mode to reproduce a half-tone photo image. The copy will closely represent
the half-tones of the original image.
Increase Contrast Mode
Select Increase Contrast to darken lightly printed images (e.g., pencil) without changing
background exposure. In cases where the image is light and background is dark, the
background will not be changed.
Resolution
Text/Photo
Enhance
Original
Auto mode
Photo mode
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation
Original
Auto mode
Text mode
Original
Auto mode
Increase
contrast mode
Specifications for Text/Photo Enhance
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: None
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: None
❒ Incompatible Applications: None
8-7
8
Scanning
Condition
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Text/Photo Enhance (continued)
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [SPECIAL ORIGINAL] to display the Original Scanning Condition Screen.
2 Touch TEXT, PHOTO, or INCREASE CONTRAST, as required.
Original Scanning Condition Screen
Control Panel
TA
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
3 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
4 Select additional copying features, as desired.
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter the desired print quantity.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
3
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
Place Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
FACE DOWN on Platen Glass
Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass.
8-8
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Text/Photo Enhance (continued)
Hint:
When using Platen memory copy, position original(s) on the platen glass and press [STORE] to
scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
When using RADF memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder and press [STORE]
to scan. See p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make a Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
Text/Photo
Enhance
PROOF COPY
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release
the mode and reset the machine.
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
8
Scanning
Condition
8-9
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Original Variety
Mixed Original
Use the Mixed original mode with the document feeder or with Memory copy to copy [A3,
B4, A4R, A4, B5 and A5*1 originals mixed], [B4, A4R, B5R, B5 and A5*1 originals mixed],
[A4R, B5R and A5*1 originals mixed], or [B5R and A5*2 originals mixed]. Each original in
the mixed set will be copied to paper of the same size (APS mode) or to paper of desired
size with appropriate ratio automatically selected (AMS mode).
APS mode
Automatically
select the paper
of the same size
as that of the
original.
Mixed size originals
AMS mode
Automatically select
magnification ratio
to copy onto the
same paper in size.
Specifications for Mixed Original
❒ Use RADF.
❒ RADF memory copy is available to store up to 1,500 pages (with maximum memory
fitted) unless memory overflow occurs.
❒ Platen memory copy is available.
❒ Original paper: A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5 and A5*1 mixed (60~130g/m2)
B4, A4R, B5R, B5 and A5*1 mixed (60~130g/m2)
A4R, B5R and A5*1 mixed (60~130g/m2)
B5R and A5*2 mixed (60~130g/m2)
❒ RADF capacity: Max. 50 sheets
❒ APS is automatically selected (can be switched to AMS when copy size is selected on
the Tray Selection Screen).
❒ Rotation can be used with AMS.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Alternate exit, Folding/Stapling & Folding with
APS, Reserve with APS, Cover sheet feeding with APS, Tandem mode
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Condition: Resolution (Very high), Non STD size
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP
interleave, Image insert, Dual page, Program job, Non-image area erase, Repeat, Frame/
Fold erasure, AUTO layout, Thin/Thick paper, Image shift, Overlay
NOTE:
*1: A5 original is available in portrait ( ) orientation only.
) orientation only.
*2: A5 original is available in landscape (
8 - 10
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Original Variety (continued)
Mixed Original (continued)
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [SPECIAL ORIGINAL] to display the Original Scanning Condition Screen.
2 Touch MIXED ORIGINAL.
Original Scanning Condition Screen
Control Panel
TA
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
CHECK
Mixed Original
JOB ME
AUTO R
3 Select additional copying features, as desired.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and to return to the Basic Screen.
5 APS is automatically selected. APS mode makes to copy each original size to a
matching paper size in 1:1 mode.
Basic Screen
To select AMS, touch PAPER SIZE. Touch the tray key to select the desired copy
size, and touch OK. AMS mode makes to copy all originals to the same paper size,
with a ratio selected automatically.
Paper Tray Selection Screen
Basic Screen
8 - 11
8
Scanning
Condition
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Original Variety (continued)
Mixed Original (continued)
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter the desired print quantity.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
3
Place Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
Position mixed originals FACE UP in the document feeder.
Align originals to the back left corner.
Hint:
When using RADF memory copy, position originals FACE UP in the document feeder and press
[STORE] to scan. See p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make a Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release
the mode and reset the machine.
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
8 - 12
START PRINT
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Original Variety (continued)
Z-Folded Original
Use the Z-folded original mode with the document feeder to copy Z-folded originals so as
not to cause paper misfeed.
Z-folded original
Mixed Original
Z-Folded
Original
Specifications for Z-Folded Original
❒ Use RADF.
❒ RADF capacity: Max. 50 sheets
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Using platen glass
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Non STD size
❒ Incompatible Applications: Dual page, Non-image area erase, Repeat, AUTO layout
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [SPECIAL ORIGINAL] to display the Original Scanning Condition Screen.
2 Touch Z-FOLDED ORIGINAL.
3 Select additional copying features, as desired.
Original Scanning Condition Screen
Control Panel
TA
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
5 Make other compatible selections.
8 - 13
8
Scanning
Condition
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Original Variety (continued)
Z-Folded Original (continued)
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter the desired print quantity.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
3
Place Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
Position Z-folded original(s) in the document feeder.
NOTE:
Normal originals can also be loaded at the
same time.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release
the mode and reset the machine.
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
8 - 14
START PRINT
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Original Form
The copier usually detects the standard size of originals fed through RADF or positioned
on the platen glass (STD size mode).
Use Non STD size mode to specify the scanning area manually for copying or printing
special size originals.
Specifications for Original Form
❒ Non STD size of original: A3, B4, F4, A4R, B5R, A4, B5, A5R, 11"x17", 8.5"x14",
8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11", WHOLE AREA
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Folding/Stapling & Folding with Booklet
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Mixed original, Z-folded original
❒ Incompatible Applications: Combination, Booklet, Dual page, Non-image area erase,
Repeat, Frame/Fold erasure, AUTO layout, Image shift
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [SPECIAL ORIGINAL] to display the Original Scanning Condition Screen.
2 Touch NON STD SIZE.
3 Touch the size key nearest to the size of the non-standard originals being used.
When selecting WHOLE AREA, the copier scans the whole area of the platen glass
and copies with the paper size or magnification ratio currently selected.
Original Scanning Condition Screen
Control Panel
Z-Folded
Original
Original Form
8
TA
Scanning
Condition
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
4 Touch OK on the area of the size keys.
5 Touch OK on the Original Scanning Condition Screen to complete the setting and
return to the Basic Screen.
6 Make other compatible selections.
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter the desired print quantity.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
8 - 15
Section 8 : Original Scanning Condition
Original Form (continued)
3
Place Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
FACE DOWN on Platen Glass
Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder, or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release
the mode and reset the machine.
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
8 - 16
START PRINT
Application
Function Menu
Section 9 : Applications
Application Function Menu
Sheet/Cover
Insertion
Chapter
Combination
Booklet
Sheet/Cover Insertion
Chapter
Combination
OHP
Interleave
Image Insert
Dual Page
Program Job
Booklet
OHP Interleave
Image Insert
Non-Image
Area Erase
Reverse
Image
Repeat
Image
Frame/Fold
Erasure
Dual Page
AUTO Layout
Program Job
Thin/Thick
Paper
Non-Image Area Erase
Image Shift
Overlay
Reverse Image
Repeat Image
Frame/Fold Erasure
AUTO Layout
Thin/Thick Paper
Image Shift
Overlay
9
Applications
Section 9 : Applications
Application Function Menu
When the [APPLICATION] key is pressed, the Application Selection Screen displays on
the touch panel. If one function on the menu is incompatible with another, it will appear
dimmed.
When a function is touched, it becomes highlighted. If you touch OK key when a function
is highlighted, another screen or two will display to enable you to enter the appropriate
settings. For example, you may select Sheet/Cover Insertion from the Application Selection
Screen; and then, select insertion type. Still, another screen will display for your page
number entries, which designate insertion locations.
When all settings are made for each function, the OK key can be touched to complete the
settings, and return you to the Application Selection Screen. If no other Applications are
desired, the OK key can be touched again to complete your selections, and bring you
back to the Basic Screen. With the Basic Screen displayed, you can press [START PRINT]
key to perform the operation.
Control Panel
Application Selection Screen
Sheet/Cover Selection Screen
Page Selection Screen
Application Selection Screen
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
To restore the original copying conditions, touch CANCEL.
To clear all Application settings, touch ALL CLEAR.
NOTES:
1 The indicator light on the [APPLICATION] key will be lit when application selections have been
made.
2 When incompatible selections are made, the last key pressed will be selected.
3 To cancel individual functions in application mode, touch the highlighted key.
To cancel all application selections, touch ALL CLEAR key on the Application Selection Screen.
9-2
Section 9 : Applications
Application
Function Menu
Sheet/Cover
Insertion
Sheet/Cover Insertion
Use Sheet/Cover Insertion in copy mode or blank mode to insert chapter sheets or separator
sheets into the finished set, as well as front and back covers. The default tray for Sheet
Insertion is tray 1 . When insertion tray is tray 1, the cover tray source can be selected
from tray 1 and Multi-sheet bypass tray. If the Thick paper mode is selected, the copier will
automatically select the Multi-sheet bypass tray. To select a paper tray other than the
default trays for sheet insertion, follow the specifications shown below to be sure the trays
you select are compatibility:
Insertion Tray
Cover Tray
Tray 1
Tray 1 or Multi-sheet bypass
Tray 3
Tray 3 or Multi-sheet bypass
Multi-sheet bypass
Multi-sheet bypass
Specifications for Sheet/Cover Insertion
❒ Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively.
❒ Max. insert sheets: 15 locations, from 1~250, including front and back covers
❒ Original paper: Max. 50 sheets; A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 8.5"x11"; 60 ~ 90g/m2
❒ Insertion tray: Tray 1 (default)
Tray 3 or Multi-sheet bypass tray can be selected by key operator. See p. 12-42 to p.
12-46.
❒ Cover tray: Tray 1 or Multi-sheet bypass tray (default)
❒ Cover tray in thick paper mode: Multi-sheet bypass tray only
❒ Regular copy paper tray: Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5
❒ Tray capacity in Sheet/Cover insertion
Tray 1
: 500 sheets (80g/m2) / 60 ~ 90g/m2; A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R,
B5; plain or coloured paper
Tray 3
: 1,000 sheets (80g/m2) / 60 ~ 90g/m2; A4
Multi-sheet bypass tray : 100 sheets (80g/m2) / 50 ~ 170g/m2; A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4,
B5R, B5; plain or coloured paper
Tray 2
: A3
Tray 4, 5
: A4
❒ AMS Automatic Magnification Selection: Functions when a different paper size is
selected.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: APS, Group, Folding/Stapling & Folding with
Booklet, Cover Sheet Feeder with Cover mode in Sheet/Cover Insertion
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original
❒ Incompatible Applications: Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP Interleave, Image Insert,
Dual page, Program Job, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO
Layout, Thin/Thick Paper, Overlay
NOTE:
*: A5 original is available in both landscape (
) and portrait (
) orientation.
9-3
9
Applications
Section 9 : Applications
Sheet/Cover Insertion (continued)
Insertion Mode
This mode is classified as Copy insertion and Blank insertion. The Copy insertion mode
copies and inserts plain or coloured sheets from tray 1 at locations designated in the Page
Setting Screen. The Blank insertion mode inserts non copied (plain or coloured) sheets
from tray 1 at locations designated in the Page Setting Screen (see insertion tray on p. 93).
The tray 1 is used in the copy mode or blank mode to insert chapter sheets or slip sheets
into the finished set. In copy mode, sheets are copied to match originals designated in the
Page Selection Screen. In blank mode, sheets are inserted without being copied. Sheet
insertion from the tray 1 can be selected with cover insertion from the Multi-sheet bypass
tray.
Front Cover Mode
This mode is classified as Front copy and Front blank. The Front copy mode copies and
inserts a plain or coloured sheet from tray 1 or the Multi-sheet bypass tray into the finished
set, as a Front cover. The Front blank mode inserts a non copied plain or coloured sheet
from tray 1 or the Multi-sheet bypass tray into the finished set, as a Front cover.
The Thick paper mode can be used in conjunction with the Front cover mode when feeding
thick paper from the Multi-sheet bypass tray (see cover tray on p. 9-3).
Back Cover Mode
This mode is classified as Back copy and Back blank. The Back copy mode copies and
inserts a plain or coloured sheet from tray 1 or the Multi-sheet bypass tray into the finished
set, as a Back cover. The Back blank mode inserts a non copied plain or coloured sheet
from tray 1 or the Multi-sheet bypass tray into the finished set, as a Back cover.
The Thick paper mode can be used in conjunction with the Back cover mode when feeding
thick paper from the Multi-sheet bypass tray. If Thick paper mode is selected in the Front
cover mode, the copier automatically feeds thick paper as a Back cover.
When using the Front cover mode and/or Back cover mode, the tray source can be selected
from tray 1 and Multi-sheet bypass tray; however, the Multi-sheet bypass tray is required
when the Thick paper mode is selected (see cover tray nad cover tray in thick paper mode
on p. 9-3).
Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray - 50~170g/m2 (Stack mode 80g/m2)
COVER INSERTION: The Multi-sheet bypass tray is used in the copy mode or blank
mode to feed front and/or back sheets, as cover inserts; and is required when the Thick
paper mode is selected for thick paper (up to 170g/m2). Cover insertion from the Multisheet bypass tray can be used in conjunction with sheet insertion from tray 1.
9-4
Section 9 : Applications
Sheet/Cover
Insertion
Sheet/Cover Insertion (continued)
Basic Functions
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
Combination samples
9 10
78
56
34
12
2
9 10
78
56
34
SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT
Originals
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
34
12
Originals
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
56
9
7 8 10
SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT
Copies
FRONT & BACK COVERS COPIED
9 10
78
56
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
9 10
78
56
34
12
SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT
4
23
Originals
Copies
FRONT COVER BLANK
9 10
78
56
34
12
4
23
Originals
Copies
FRONT COVER COPIED
9 10
78
56
34
12
10
89
67
45
23
56
9 10
78
Copies
FRONT & BACK COVERS BLANK
SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT
4
23
9
7 8 10
56
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
Originals
9 10
78
56
34
12
Copies
23
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
56
89
10
7
4
1
BACK COVER COPIED
SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT
10
89
67
45
23
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
34
12
56
9 10
78
Originals
FRONT & BACK COVERS COPIED,
AND COPY SHEET INSERTION
Originals
Copies
BACK COVER BLANK
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
9 10
78
56
34
12
Copies
SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT
23
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
9 10
78
56
34
12
6
45
78
9 10
9
Applications
10
89
56
7
4
Originals
Originals
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
3
12
Copies
Copies
FRONT & BACK COVERS BLANK,
AND BLANK SHEET INSERTION
COPY SHEET INSERTION
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
9 10
78
56
34
12
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
Originals
3
12
6
45
78
9 10
Plus many more combinations
of functions, e.g. copied front
cover with blank insert sheets
and blank back cover.
Copies
BLANK SHEET INSERTION
9-5
Section 9 : Applications
Sheet/Cover Insertion (continued)
Procedure
1
Load Paper for Insertions and Covers
1 First, load insert sheets into tray 1, and load regular sheets of the same size as those
in tray 1 into any of the trays 2 to 5.
2 If covers are required, load 80g/m2 cover sheets in the Multi-sheet bypass tray. Use
the Thick paper mode to insert the front and/or back cover that is thicker than 80g/
m2.
Multi-sheet bypass tray: Covers
Tray 1: Insertions
or covers
Trays 2, 3, 4, 5:
Copy paper
2
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Sheet/Cover Insertion to display the Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen.
3 Select the tray from which the front/back cover is fed.
Touch Tray 1* for feeding from tray 1, or Bypass for feeding from the Multi-sheet
bypass tray. (See note.) If Thick paper mode is selected, Bypass will automatically
be selected.
Application Selection Screen
Sheet/Cover Selection Screen
4 Select Front Cover Insertion.
Touch FRONT COPY to insert a copied front cover, or FRONT BLANK to insert a
blank front cover.
To insert thick paper for the front cover, select Thick paper mode and use the bypass
tray.
Proceed to step 5 to select Back Cover Insertion, if desired.
Proceed to step 6 to select Sheet Insertion, if desired.
NOTE:
* See the cover tray on p. 9-3
9-6
Section 9 : Applications
Sheet/Cover
Insertion
Sheet/Cover Insertion (continued)
5 Select Back Cover Insertion.
Touch BACK COPY to insert a copied back cover, or BACK BLANK to insert a blank
back cover.
To insert a thick paper for the back cover, touch Thick paper.
Return to step 4 to select Front Cover Insertion, if desired.
Proceed to step 6 to select Sheet Insertion, if desired.
Max. insertion locations: 15
6 Select Sheet Insertion*.
Touch COPY INSERTION to insert copied sheets, or BLANK INSERTION to insert
blank sheets.
Return to step 4 to select Front Cover Insertion, if desired.
Return to step 5 to select Back Cover Insertion, if desired.
Touch OK to display the Page Selection Screen.
NOTE:
* See the insertion tray on p. 9-3
7 The screen displays 15 boxes to designate each insertion location.
The first (upper left) box displays Front Cover Insertion icon if selected, while the last
(lower right) box displays Back Cover Insertion icon if selected.
Touch the first blank box and use keypad to enter the page number of each insertion
location.
Touch SET after each entry to move to the next box.
Example: If p. 4 is entered in blank mode, a blank sheet will be inserted between p.
4 and p. 5; in copy mode, a copied sheet is inserted at p. 4.
To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE or press [C] (CLEAR QTY.). The insertion
location will be deleted.
To enter the correct page number, touch SET and use keypad.
When all page numbers are entered, touch OK.
NOTE:
Entering the same page number twice will prevent the copier from proceeding to the next operation.
Delete it, if entered.
Control Panel
Page Selection Screen
R
EM
PRINT QUANTITY
INT
PRO
LP
RY
ET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
STA
8 Make additional Application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
9-7
9
Applications
Section 9 : Applications
Sheet/Cover Insertion (continued)
3
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
4
Position Originals ... FACE UP
Position originals FACE UP in the document
feeder.
Hint:
When using Platen memory copy, position original(s) on the platen glass and press [STORE] to
scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
When using RADF memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder and press [STORE]
to scan. See p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to
return to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
5
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
After copying is completed, touch Sheet/Cover Insertion
on the Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET]
to release the mode and reset the machine.
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9-8
Section 9 : Applications
Sheet/Cover
Insertion
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter is used with RADF in 1s2 or 2s2 mode for the purpose of locating title pages
on the right side, rather than reverse side, of a duplex copy.
To effectively locate the title page on the right, a blank sheet will be automatically created
on the reverse side of a sheet, if required.
Specifications for Chapter
❒ Title pages: Max. 15 from 2 ~ 250
❒ Copy mode: 1s2 or 2s2 mode only
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: 1s1, 2s1, Group
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, OHP Interleave, Image
Insert, Dual page, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout,
Thin/Thick Paper, Image Shift, Overlay
1-sided originals
Copies in Chapter mode
Title page
2-sided originals
5
34
1 2
6
4
8
6
2
7 8
3
5
7
8
Title pages
7
4
6
5
2
9
3
1
1
Applications
Title pages
Title page
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Chapter. The Chapter Insertion Setting No. Screen will be displayed. The
1s2 mode is automatically selected.
Application Selection Screen
Chapter Insertion Setting No. Screen
9-9
Section 9 : Applications
Chapter (continued)
Chapter Insertion Setting No. Screen
Control Panel
R
EM
PRINT QUANTITY
INT
PRO
LP
RY
ET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
STA
3 Use the keypad on the control panel to enter the page number of each title page.
4 Touch SET.
To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE or press [C] (CLEAR QTY.). The insertion
location will be deleted.
To enter the correct page number, touch SET and use keypad.
5 Repeat this for each title page number you want to appear on the right hand side.
You can set up to a total of 15 entries.
Option:
Touch Booklet on the Chapter Insertion Setting No. Screen to use this function. To change the
selection of paper tray for copying title pages, touch Copy Insertion on the screen.
NOTES:
1. Entering the same page number twice will prevent the copier from proceeding to the next
operation. Delete it, if entered.
2. Chapter insertions occur in sequence even if original page numbers are entered out of sequence.
3. When a page number is larger that the total original page count, insertion occurs as the last
page of the document.
6 When all entries are made, touch OK.
7 Make additional Application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
9 - 10
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
Section 9 : Applications
Chapter (continued)
3
Chapter
Position Originals ... FACE UP
Position originals FACE UP on the document
feeder. 50 originals can be set.
Hint:
When using Platen memory copy, position original(s) on the platen glass and press [STORE] to
scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
When using the RADF memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder and press [STORE]
to scan. See p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to
return to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
After copying is completed, touch Chapter on the
Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET] to
release the mode and reset the machine.
9
Applications
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9 - 11
Section 9 : Applications
Combination
Use this function to lay out and copy a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet
of copy paper (2 in 1, 4 in 1, or 8 in 1).
Specifications for Combination
❒ Scan and store originals into memory.
❒ Use RADF.
Memory copy is also available; in this case, use platen glass.
❒ AMS is automatically selected. (Normally the fixed size of Tray 1 will be selected.)
❒ Original size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: APS, Group, Folding/Stapling & Folding with
Boolket
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original, Non
STD size
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Booklet, OHP Interleave,
Image Insert, Dual page, Program Job, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat, Frame/Fold
Erasure, AUTO Layout, Thin/Thick Paper, Overlay
NOTE:
*: A5 original is available in both landscape (
) and portrait (
) orientation.
4 in 1 copying
Original
2 in 1 copying
8 in 1 copying
1
1
2
1 2 3 4
2
3
4
5 6 7 8
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Combination to display the Combination Mode Selection Screen.
3 Touch 2 in 1, 4 in 1, or 8 in 1 and select one key between the two in the Layout area,
referring to the illustration on the next page.
Application Selection Screen
9 - 12
Combination Mode Selection Screen
Section 9 : Applications
Combination (continued)
Combination
Layout
Original
2 in 1
4 in 1
8 in 1
2 in 1
4 in 1
8 in 1
Portrait type
1
1
2
2
3
4
Landscape type
1
2
1
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
3
1 3 5 7
2
2
1
2
4
2 4 6 8
1
5
1
3
2
6
2
4
3
7
4
8
4
5
6
7
Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
Select additional copying features, as desired.
Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
AMS is automatically selected. When selecting any tray other than the one that is set
and displayed on the Basic Screen, touch PAPER SIZE to display the Paper Tray
Selection Screen.
8 Touch the desired tray key and touch OK.
Paper Tray Selection Screen
Basic Screen
9
Applications
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
9 - 13
Section 9 : Applications
Combination (continued)
3
Position Originals ... FACE UP
Place original(s) FACE UP in the document
feeder.
Hint:
When using Platen memory copy, position original(s) on the platen glass and press [STORE] to
scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
When using the RADF memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder and press [STORE]
to scan. See p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy if desired; then touch EXIT to
return to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
After copying is completed, touch Combination on the
Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET] to
release the mode and reset the machine.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9 - 14
Section 9 : Applications
Booklet
Use the Booklet to make a multiple page signature booklet on both sides of A3, B4, A4R,
B5R, or 8.5"x11"R paper from tray 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. Original images are scanned into
memory and automatically arranged in booklet format in correct order.
Specifications for Booklet
❒ Scan and store original into memory, then print all the pages collectively.
❒ Store up to 1,500 pages in memory (with maximum memory fitted) unless memory
overflow occurs.
❒ Use RADF.
❒ Use Platen Memory Copy for originals that cannot be fed throuth RADF.
❒ AMS is automatically selected.
❒ Original pages should be a multiple of 4; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted
to the last.
❒ Copy mode: 1s2 mode is automatically selected. (2s2 mode can be selected.)
❒ Folding/Stapling & Folding output mode is available when the copier is equipped with
FS-108BM Finisher.
❒ Original size: A4R, A4, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5"x11"
❒ Copy paper size: A3, B4, A4R, B5R, or 8.5"x11"R
❒ When cover sheet mode is selected, copy paper for cover sheet is fed from Tray 1.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: APS, Group, 1s1, 2s1, Cover sheet feeder
with Cover mode in Booklet
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original, Non
STD size
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, OHP Interleave,
Program Job, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout,
Thin/Thick Paper, Shift mode in Image Shift, Overlay
Combination
Booklet
9
Applications
1-sided originals
..............
1
3
2
48
47
4
..............
25
45
46 3
3
1
26 23
7
5
24
48 1
4
2
47
Booklet copying
47
45
2-sided originals
48
46
8
6
4
2
..............
9 - 15
Section 9 : Applications
Booklet (continued)
Procedure
1
Load Copy Paper
Load A3, B4, A4R, B5R, or 8.5"x11"R copy paper in a tray.
When selecting cover sheet mode (COVER WITH COPY SHEET or COVER WITH
BLANK SHEET), load the same size paper in Tray 1.
NOTE:
Do not load thick paper in Tray 1; otherwise paper misfeed will occur.
2
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Booklet to enter the Booklet Mode Selection Screen.
Application Selection Screen
Booklet Mode Selection Screen
3 Touch NO COVER SHEET, COVER WITH COPY SHEET, or COVER WITH BLANK
SHEET, as required.
4 Touch OK.
5 Select additional copying features, as desired.
Using the Reduce & shift mode of Image shift will make
a binding area in the centre of the copies.
6 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic
Screen.
Booklet
Booklet + Reduce & Shift
9 - 16
Section 9 : Applications
Booklet (continued)
7 Select the copy mode.
(1) Touch COPY MODE to display the Copy Mode Screen.
(2) Select 1-2 or 2-2.
(3) Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
8 AMS is selected automatically.
When selecting any tray other than the tray that is set and displayed on the Basic
Screen, touch PAPER SIZE. Select desired tray key in the Paper Tray Selection
Screen, then touch OK. To release AMS, select the desired magnification, then select
paper size.
Copy Mode Screen
Paper Tray Selection Screen
9 If the copier is equipped with FS-108BM Finisher, Folding or Stapling & Folding
output mode is available. Follow the procedure below.
(1) Press [OUTPUT] on the control panel to display the Output Mode Screen, then touch
MAIN TRAY to highlight it.
Touch Stapling & Folding or Folding, as desired.
NOTE:
Selecting Folding or Stapling & Folding will automatically switch the output tray to Booklet tray.
Notice that the arrow pointing to the MAIN TRAY shifts to the Booklet tray.
(2) Touch OK on the Output Mode Screen. The Basic Screen will be restored and the
[OUTPUT] light will go on.
Control Panel
Booklet
Output Mode Screen
OUTPUT
STAPLE SORT
SORT
9 - 17
9
Applications
Section 9 : Applications
Booklet (continued)
3
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
4
Position Originals ... FACE UP
Position A4R, A4, or B5 originals FACE UP
onto the document feeder.
NOTE:
When loading originals, heed the following limits on capacity:
Folding mode
6 pages or less for simplex copying
12 pages or less for duplex copying
Stapling & Folding mode 32 pages or less for simplex copying
64 pages or less for duplex copying
Exceeding the above limits on capacity may cause trouble in the finisher.
Hint:
When using Platen memory copy, position original(s) on the platen glass and press [STORE] to
scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
When using RADF memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder and press [STORE]
to scan. See p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to
return to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
9 - 18
Section 9 : Applications
Booklet (continued)
5
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
After copying is completed, touch Booklet on the Application
Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET] to release the
mode and reset the machine.
Booklet
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
CAUTION
When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will cease operating. To avoid
such trouble, select an appropriate print quantity from the specifications on p. 7-14.
CAUTION
The roller drive unit is located inside the Booklet tray of the finisher. DO NOT put your hand
into the roller drive unit when removing folded or stapled & folded sheets; otherwise, you
may be injured.
9 - 19
9
Applications
Section 9 : Applications
OHP Interleave
Use the OHP interleave function in 1s1 or 2s1 mode to copy onto overhead projection
transparencies, and output a blank or copied interleaf sheet with each copied transparency.
In the blank mode, a blank interleaf sheet is output with each transparency to keep the film
material from sticking together.
In the copy mode, a copied interleaf sheet is output with each transparency to provide
reference during a presentation; a medium for photocopying; and a set for filing or inserting
into a binder.
Specifications for OHP Interleave
❒ AMS is automatically selected.
❒ Use document feeder (RADF).
Memory copy is also available; in this case use platen glass or RADF.
❒ Transparency source: Multi-sheet bypass tray
❒ Multi-sheet bypass tray capacity: 1 OHP sheet
❒ OHP film size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Interleaving paper source: Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5
❒ Interleaving paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Print quantity: 1
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: APS, 1s2, 2s2, Staple-sort, Sort, Group,
Folding/Stapling & Folding, Interrupt, Tandem mode
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image
Insert, Dual page, Program Job, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat, Frame/Fold Erasure,
AUTO Layout, Thin/Thick Paper, Image Shift, Overlay
NOTE:
*: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
Original
) only.
Blank sheet Interleaving
Procedure
1
Load Interleave Paper and Transparent Film
1 Load copy paper in tray 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to match the size
of transparent films.
2 Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray. Insert a sheet of
transparent film at a time into the Multi-sheet bypass tray,
and adjust the paper guides.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT LOAD TRANSPARENT FILMS
INTO ANY OTHER TRAY.
9 - 20
Copy sheet Interleaving
Section 9 : Applications
OHP Interleave (continued)
2
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch OHP Interleave to display the OHP Interleave Screen.
Application Selection Screen
OHP
Interleave
OHP Interleave Screen
3 Touch Blank sheet Interleaving or Copy sheet Interleaving, unless it is already
highlighted.
4 Touch OK.
5 Make additional Application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
3
Enter Print Quantity
Print quantity is already set to 1. Not available to enter any other number.
9
4
Applications
Position Originals ... FACE UP
Place originals FACE UP in the document
feeder.
Hint:
When using Platen memory copy, position original(s) on the platen glass and press [STORE] to
scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
When using RADF memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder and press [STORE]
to scan. See p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to
return to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
9 - 21
Section 9 : Applications
OHP Interleave (continued)
5
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
After copying is completed, touch OHP Interleave on the
Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET] to
release the mode and reset the machine.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
9 - 22
START PRINT
Section 9 : Applications
Image Insert
Use the Image insert mode to combine images scanned from the platen glass, such as
photos, paste-ups, newspaper articles, graphs, etc., with images scanned from the
document feeder. Then, output the combined images as a finished set.
The selected copy paper size is determined by the size of originals loaded in the document
feeder.
Specifications for Image Insert
❒ All images are stored in memory.
❒ Max. image insert: 15 locations
❒ Original size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*2, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Group
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, OHP
Interleave, Dual page, Program Job, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat, Frame/Fold
Erasure, AUTO Layout, Thin/Thick Paper, Image Shift, Overlay
NOTE:
*1: A5 original is available in both landscape (
) and portrait (
*2: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
OHP
Interleave
Image Insert
) orientation.
Place originals
onto RADF
1
23
45
6
7 8
5
6
7 8
9
34
1
2
Applications
Insertion originals
5
7
7
2
2
4
3
6
8
6
8
Place originals
onto RADF
5
4
3
1
1
Procedure
1
Preparation
Review pages to be scanned from the document feeder, and note the page number
locations for inserting images scanned from the platen glass.
To insert more than one sheet at the same location, enter the page number repeatedly.
For example, if insertion locations are [2/2/6], scanned platen images will be inserted
as follows:
The first scanned platen image will be inserted after page 2.
The second scanned platen image will be inserted directly after the first scanned Image
insertion.
The third scanned platen image will be inserted after page 6.
9 - 23
Section 9 : Applications
Image Insert (continued)
2
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Image Insert to display the Image Insertion No. Setting Screen.
Application Selection Screen
Image Insertion No. Setting Screen
3 Use the keypad to enter the page numbers for up to 15 insertion locations, touching
SET after each entry.
• When a page number is larger than the total original count, a sheet is inserted as
the last page.
• Insertions occur in sequence, even if page numbers are entered out of sequence.
• To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE or [C] (CLEAR QTY.), then enter the
correct page number.
4 When all page number entries are made, touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be displayed.
5 Select additional copying features, as desired.
6 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
3
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
9 - 24
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
Section 9 : Applications
Image Insert (continued)
4
RADF: Place/Scan Originals ... FACE UP
Scan the document feeder images.
(1) Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.
(2) Press [STORE] to scan originals.
TA
Image Insert
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
5
Platen Glass: Place/Scan Originals ... FACE DOWN
Scan the platen glass images.
(1) Open the document feeder.
(2) Position an original FACE DOWN on the platen glass, then close the document
feeder.
IMPORTANT: PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS ACCORDING TO PAGINATION.
(3) Press [STORE] to begin scanning.
(4) Remove the original, and repeat for each original.
Be sure to press [STORE] for each original.
TA
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make a Proof copy if desired; then EXIT to return to the
Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
9 - 25
9
Applications
Section 9 : Applications
Image Insert (continued)
6
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
After copying is completed, touch Image Insert on the
Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET] to
release the mode and reset the machine.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9 - 26
Section 9 : Applications
Dual Page
The Dual Page mode performs image division on the original image. Use Dual Page in
1s1 or 1s2 mode to copy an open book or a A3/B4 size sheet onto two A4/B5 sheets.
If you select another paper size, image division will perform incorrectly.
The following three modes can be selected from the Dual Page Screen.
1 Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the first scan.
2 Front Cover + Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the second scan,
after the first scan copies normally.
3 Front/Back + Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the third scan, after
the first and second scan copy normally.
Image Insert
Dual Page
Specifications for Dual Page
❒ Scan and store originals into memory, then print all pages collectively.
❒ Original size: A3, B4
❒ Paper size: A4, B5, 8.5"x11"
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Using RADF, 2s2, 2s1, APS, AMS, Group,
Folding/Stapling & Folding with Booklet, RADF memory copy
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original, Zfolded Original, Non STD size
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP
Interleave, Image Insert, Program Job, Reverse Image, Repeat, Frame/Fold Erasure,
Thin/Thick Paper, Image Shift, Overlay
Set original
9
Applications
1s2 mode
1s1 mode
9 - 27
Section 9 : Applications
Dual Page (continued)
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to access the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Dual Page to enter the Dual Page Screen. AUTO layout and Non-image area
erase will be automatically selected.
Application Selection Screen
Dual Page Screen
3 Touch facing pages, front cover + facing pages, or front/back + facing pages, as
required.
Option:
Touch Booklet on the Dual Page Screen to use this function.
4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
5 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
6 Select the copy mode (1s1 or 1s2).
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
9 - 28
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
Section 9 : Applications
Dual Page (continued)
3
Place/Scan Originals on the Platen Glass ... FACE DOWN
1 Position the open book or sheet on the platen glass in the right rear corner, aligning
the edge with the right measuring guide. To output the set in the same order as the
originals, start scanning from the first page.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection and make a Proof copy; then touch EXIT to return to the
Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
Dual Page
“front cover + facing pages”
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
4
23
Scan from
first page
56
9 10
78
SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT
Copies
“front/back + facing pages”
4
23
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
Scan from
first page
56
9 10
78
SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT
Copies
2 Press [STORE] to start scanning.
3 Remove the first original. If desired, repeat the procedure
for subsequent originals, pressing [STORE] for each
original.
TA
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT]. Two A4 (or B5/8.5"x11") sheets are
output.
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
After copying is completed, touch Dual Page on the
Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET] to
release the mode and reset the machine.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9 - 29
9
Applications
Section 9 : Applications
Program Job
Use this function with the memory copy mode to designate a specific paper tray for multiple
sets of originals to be output in a collective printing job.
Program Job Specifications
❒ Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively.
NOTE:
Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact your Konica service
centre to extend the memory capacity in your machine.
❒ Use Memory copy.
❒ APS and AMS are automatically released.
❒ Paper size cannot be changed throughout the job.
Only the trays containing the same paper size can be designated.
❒ Copy mode can be changed throughout the job, though only the last selected mode
selected last will be applied.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: ATS, APS, AMS, Change magnification,
Rotation, Group, Folding, Stapling & Folding, Tandem mode
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Booklet, OHP Interleave,
Image Insert, Dual Page, Thin/Thick Paper, Image Shift, Overlay
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
Application Selection Screen
Basic Screen (with Program Job selected)
2 Touch Program Job. The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.
The [STORE] light goes on.
3 Select additional copying features, as desired.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
5 The “PROGRAM JOB” icon appears on the Basic Screen, and APS and AMS are
automatically released.
Set the desired Copy mode, Copy density, and Paper size on the Basic Screen.
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter the correct quantity.
9 - 30
Section 9 : Applications
Program Job (continued)
3
Position Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
FACE DOWN on Platen Glass
1 Position the first set of original(s) to be scanned in the document feeder or on the
platen glass, then press [STORE] to scan.
TA
2 Touch PAPER SIZE on the Basic Screen to change the
tray source, if desired.
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
3 Follow the same procedure as above to scan the second
and subsequent sets of originals.
IMPORTANT: PLACE AND SCAN EACH ORIGINAL SET
IN THE CORRECT ORDER OF PAGINATION.
APPLICATION
CHECK
Program Job
ROTATION OFF
STORE
JOB ME
AUTO R
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
9
PROOF COPY
Applications
After copying is completed, touch Program Job on the
Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET] to
release the mode and reset the machine.
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9 - 31
Section 9 : Applications
Non-Image Area Erase
The Non-image area erase mode is used to copy non standard or special originals, such
as books, magazines, paste-ups, graphs, thick or thin materials, etc. from the platen
glass. The exposed glass area outside the borders of the original will not be copied.
This mode helps to preserve the condition of originals; improves copy quality, and eliminates
unnecessary toner consumption. Keep the document cover open throughout the procedure.
General copying
Non-Image Area Erase
Set original
The Non-image area erase has two modes; namely, Rectangular erase mode and Oblique
erase mode. The copier is initially set to Rectangular erase mode. Contact your service
centre if you desire the Oblique erase mode.
Oblique erase mode
Rectangular erase mode
Specifications for Non-Image Area Erase
❒ Copy mode: 1s1 mode only (when using Memory copy, 1s2 mode can be selected.)
❒ Use the platen glass only.
❒ Original size: A3 ~ 10mm x 10mm
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Image cutoff width: leading end 5mm, trailing end 4mm, top and bottom 2mm.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Using RADF, 2s2, 2s1, APS, AMS, Folding/
Stapling & Folding with Booklet, Tandem mode
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very High), Mixed Original, Zfolded Original, Non STD size
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP
Interleave, Image Insert, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure, Image Shift, Overlay
NOTE:
*: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
NOTE:
The Non-image area erase function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is
directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service centre about an appropriate place
for installation.
9 - 32
Section 9 : Applications
Non-Image Area Erase (continued)
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Non-Image Area Erase. The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to
show inactivity.
Application Selection Screen
Non-Image
Area Erase
3 Select additional copying features, as desired.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
MORY
ESET
9
Applications
HELP
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
3
Position Originals ... FACE DOWN
Position original(s) FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
IMPORTANT: KEEP THE DOCUMENT FEEDER OPEN
THROUGHOUT THE PROCEDURE.
Hint:
When using Platen memory copy, position original(s) on the platen glass and press [STORE] to
scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make a Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
9 - 33
Section 9 : Applications
Non-Image Area Erase (continued)
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
After copying is completed, touch Non-Image Area Erase
on the Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO
RESET] to release the mode and reset the machine.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9 - 34
Section 9 : Applications
Reverse Image
Use Reverse image to reverse the image from black-on-white to white-on-black, and vice
versa.
Specifications for Reverse Image
❒ RADF APS detects size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, 8.5"x11"
❒ Platen APS detects size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*2, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*3, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: None
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: None
❒ Incompatible Applications: Dual Page, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout
NOTE:
*1: A5 original is available in both landscape (
) and portrait (
*2: A5 original is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
) only.
*3: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
Original
) orientation.
Non-Image
Area Erase
Reverse
Image
Reverse Image copying
9
Procedure
Applications
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Reverse Image. The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show
inactivity.
Application Selection Screen
3 Select additional copying features, as desired.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
9 - 35
Section 9 : Applications
Reverse Image (continued)
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
3
Position Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
FACE DOWN on Platen Glass
Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass.
Hint:
When using Platen memory copy, position original(s) on the platen glass and press [STORE] to
scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
When using RADF memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder and press [STORE]
to scan. See p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make a Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
After copying is completed, touch Reverse Image on the
Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET] to
release the mode and reset the machine.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9 - 36
Section 9 : Applications
Repeat Image
Use Repeat image to create labels, business cards, tickets, etc., by repeating the selected
image down the page.
Manual Setting mode
Repeat the selected image area of 10mm ~ 300mm in both vertical and horizontal widths
measured from the rear right corner of the A3 original area indicated on the right edge of
the platen glass.
Auto Setting mode
Selecting this mode will automatically set the equal repeat area to the size of the original
placed onto the platen glass by activating Non-image area erase.
Manual setting mode
Reverse
Image
Auto setting mode
Repeat
Image
Verti.
width
Horiz. width
9
Original
Original
Repeat copying
Applications
Repeat copying
Specifications for Repeat Image
❒ Use the Platen glass. (Document feeder cannot be used.)
❒ Repeat width: 10~300mm
❒ Scanning area: A3 ~ 10mm x 10mm
❒ Copy mode: 1-1 mode only. (When using Memory copy, 1s2 mode can be selected.)
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Using RADF, 2s2, 2s1, APS, AMS, Group,
Folding/Stapling & Folding with Booklet, Tandem mode
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original, Zfolded Original, Non STD size
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP
Interleave, Image Insert, Dual Page, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout,
Image Shift, Overlay
NOTE:
The auto setting mode of the Repeat image function may not operate properly if the lighting in the
work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service centre about an
appropriate place for installation.
9 - 37
Section 9 : Applications
Repeat Image (continued)
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Repeat to display the Repeat Mode Selection Screen.
Application Selection Screen
Repeat Mode Selection Screen
3 To select the Manual setting mode:
(1) Touch Vertical/Horizontal.
(2) Use the upper/lower arrow key of the vertical width to adjust the vertical width of
the repeat image, from 10~300 mm in 1 mm increments.
(3) Use the upper/lower arrow key of the horizontal width to adjust the horizontal
width of the repeat image, from 10~300 mm in 1 mm increments.
To select the Auto setting mode:
(1) Touch AUTO. Non-image area erase will function automatically to set the Auto
mode.
4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
5 Select additional copying features, as desired.
6 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
9 - 38
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
Section 9 : Applications
Repeat Image (continued)
3
Position Originals ... FACE DOWN
Position original(s) FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT CLOSE THE DOCUMENT FEEDER.
Manual setting mode
Auto setting mode
Verti.
width
Horiz. width
Repeat
Image
Hint:
When using Platen memory copy, 1-2 mode can be selected.
Position original on the platen glass and press [STORE] to scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make a Proof copy if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
After copying is completed, touch Repeat on the Application
Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET] to release the
mode and reset the machine.
9
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
Applications
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9 - 39
Section 9 : Applications
Frame/Fold Erasure
Use Frame/Fold Erasure to eliminate black copy marks along borders.
Specifications for Frame/Fold Erasure
❒ Frame erasure amount: 1~15 mm in 1 mm increments
❒ Initial frame erasure value: 10 mm
❒ Fold erasure amount: 1~30 mm in 1 mm increments
❒ Initial fold erasure value: 10 mm
❒ Frame erasure original size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, A5*1, 8.5"x11"R
❒ Frame erasure paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, A5*2, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Fold erasure original size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, 8.5"x11"R
❒ Fold erasure paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Folding/Stapling & Folding with Booklet
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Mixed Original, Non STD size
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP
Interleave, Image Insert, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Overlay
NOTE:
*1: A5 original is available in landscape orientation (
) only on platen glass.
A5 original is available in both landscape (
) and portrait ( ) orientation on RADF.
*2: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
Frame
erasure
Place original
General copying
9 - 40
Frame Erasure
copying
Frame
erasure
Frame
erasure
Fold
erasure
Fold Erasure
copying
Frame
erasure
Frame/Fold Erasure
copying
Section 9 : Applications
Frame/Fold Erasure (continued)
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to enter the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Frame/Fold Erasure to display the Frame/Fold Erasure Selection Screen.
Application Selection Screen
Frame/Fold Erasure Selection Screen
Frame/Fold
Erasure
3 Touch Frame Erasure, then use arrows to select the desired frame erasure amount,
from 1~15 mm in 1 mm increments.
Touch Fold Erasure, then use arrows to select the desired fold erasure amount, from
1~30 mm in 1 mm increments.
Touch Frame Erasure and Fold Erasure to copy both modes.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting. The Application Selection Screen will be displayed.
5 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen or make additional application selections.
6 Select desired Paper Size.
Applications
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
9
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
9 - 41
Section 9 : Applications
Frame/Fold Erasure (continued)
3 Position Originals ... FACE
FACE UP in RADF
DOWN on Platen Glass
Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass.
Hint:
When using Platen memory copy, position original(s) on the platen glass and press [STORE] to
scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
When using RADF memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder and press [STORE]
to scan. See p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make a Proof copy if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
After copying is completed, touch Frame/Fold Erasure on
the Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET]
to release the mode and reset the machine.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9 - 42
Section 9 : Applications
AUTO Layout
Use this function to detect the image area of the original on the platen glass and centre
the whole image on the copy paper.
Specifications for AUTO Layout
❒ Copy mode is automatically set to 1s1; 1s2 mode is also available, but only when
using the Auto Layout function in combination with Memory copy.
❒ APS and AMS are released. Changing Magnification is available.
❒ RADF cannot be used.
❒ Non-image area erase is automatically selected.
❒ Original size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*2, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Using RADF, 2s2, 2s1, APS, AMS, Folding/
Stapling & Folding with Booklet
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original, Zfolded Original, Non STD size
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP
Interleave, Image Insert, Reverse Image, Repeat, Frame/Fold Erasure, Image Shift,
Overlay
NOTE:
1
* : A5 original is available in landscape orientation (
*2: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
Frame/Fold
Erasure
AUTO Layout
) only.
) only.
9
Applications
Auto layout
Place original
NOTE:
The AUTO layout function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over
the platen glass. In this case, consult your service centre about an appropriate place for installation.
9 - 43
Section 9 : Applications
AUTO Layout (continued)
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch AUTO Layout. The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.
Application Selection Screen
3 Select additional copying features, as desired.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
5 Select the desired paper size.
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
3
Position Originals ... FACE DOWN
Position original on the platen glass.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT CLOSE THE DOCUMENT FEEDER.
PLACING ORIGINAL OBLIQUELY ON THE PLATEN GLASS
MAY CAUSE BLACK COPY MARKS.
Hint:
When using Platen memory copy, position the original(s) on the platen glass and press [STORE]
to scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make a Proof copy if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
9 - 44
Section 9 : Applications
AUTO Layout (continued)
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
After copying is completed, touch AUTO Layout on the
Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET] to
release the mode and reset the machine.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
AUTO Layout
9
Applications
9 - 45
Section 9 : Applications
Thin/Thick Paper
Use this function to select the appropriate mode when the original paper is thin or thick.
Specifications for Thin/Thick Paper
❒ Thin/Thick paper source: Multi-sheet bypass tray (single feed mode)
❒ RADF APS detects size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, 8.5"x11"
❒ Platen APS detects size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*2, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*3, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Thin copy paper weight: 50~59g/m2
❒ Thick copy paper weight: 91~170g/m2
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: 1s2, 2s2, APS, Sort, Group, Staple-sort,
Folding/Stapling & Folding with Thick Paper mode in Thin/Thick Paper
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP
Interleave, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Overlay
NOTE:
*1: A5 original is available in both landscape (
) and portrait (
*2: A5 original is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
) only.
*3: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) orientation.
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Thin/Thick Paper to enter the Thin/Thick Paper Selection Screen.
Application Selection Screen
3
4
5
6
Thin/Thick Paper Selection Screen
Touch THIN PAPER, or THICK PAPER, as required.
Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
Select additional copying features, as desired.
Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
2
Load Copy Paper onto Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray. Insert one sheet of thin
or thick paper at a time into the Multi-sheet bypass tray,
and adjust the paper guides.
9 - 46
Section 9 : Applications
Thin/Thick Paper (continued)
3
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
4
START
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
Position Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
FACE DOWN on Platen Glass
Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass.
Thin/Thick
Paper
Hint:
When using Platen memory copy, position original(s) on the platen glass and press [STORE] to
scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
When using RADF memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder and press [STORE]
to scan. See p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make a Proof copy if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
5
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
After copying is completed, touch Thin/Thick Paper on
the Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET]
to release the mode and reset the machine.
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9 - 47
9
Applications
Section 9 : Applications
Image Shift
Use Image shift to create a new binding margin on originals copied in the 1-1 or 2-2 mode,
or adjust existing margins on originals copied in the 1-2 or 2-1 mode. If image loss is likely,
select the Reduce & shift mode instead of regular Image shift.
Specifications for Image Shift
❒ Use RADF.
❒ RADF memory copy is available to store up to 1,500 pages (with maximum memory
fitted) unless memory overflow occurs.
❒ Platen memory copy is available.
❒ Shift amount of Shift mode: –99 ~ 250 mm in 1 mm increments
❒ Shift amount of Reduce & shift mode: 1 ~ 250 mm in 1 mm increments
❒ RADF APS detects size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, 8.5"x11"
❒ Platen APS detects size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*2, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*3, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions with Shift mode: Group, Folding/Stapling &
Folding with Booklet
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions with Reduce & shift mode: Change magnification,
V/H zoom, APS, Group
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original, Non
STD size
❒ Incompatible Applications with Shift mode: Chapter, Booklet, OHP Interleave, Image
Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout
❒ Incompatible Applications with Reduce & shift mode: Chapter, OHP Interleave, Image
Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Thin/
Thick Paper, Overlay
NOTE:
*1: A5 original is available in both landscape (
) and portrait (
) only.
*2: A5 original is available in landscape orientation (
*3: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
2-1 mode
2
4
1-1 mode
) orientation.
4
4
4
3
3
2
1
Originals
2
1
2
1
3
3
1
Originals
1-2 mode
2-2 mode
1
3
8
1
5
6
2
1
Originals
9 - 48
8
3
Copies
6
5
2
Originals
4
7
4
4
3
2
4
7
2
3
1
Copies
Copies
Copies
Section 9 : Applications
Image Shift (continued)
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Select 1s1, 1s2, 2s2 or 2s1 copy mode from the Basic Screen, as required.
2 Press [APPLICATION] to enter the Application Selection Screen.
3 Touch Image Shift to display the Image Shift Selection Screen.
Application Selection Screen when
selecting Shift Mode
Application Selection Screen when
selecting Reduce & Shift Mode
Image Shift Selection Screen
Image Shift Selection Screen
Image Shift
9
Applications
4 Touch Image Shift or Reduce & Shift.
5 If selecting 1s1 copy mode in step 1, touch the upper or lower arrow key next to
AMOUNT (Front) to select the desired shift amount (shift mode, –99~250mm; reduce
& shift mode, 1~250mm).
6 If selecting 2s1 or 1s2 copy mode in step 1, touch the upper or lower arrow key
next to AMOUNT (Front) and AMOUNT (Back) to select the desired shift amount
(shift mode, –99~250mm; reduce & shift mode, 1~250mm).
NOTE:
In Reduce & shift mode, it cannot be selected the amount of Front and Back individually.
7 If selecting 2s2 copy mode in step 1, touch the upper or lower arrow key next to
AMOUNT (Front) to select the desired shift amount (shift mode, –99~250mm; reduce
& shift mode, 1~250mm).
And touch the upper or lower arrow key next to AMOUNT (Back) to select the desired
shift amount (shift mode, –99~250mm; reduce & shift mode, 1~250mm).
NOTE:
In Reduce & shift mode, it cannot be selected the amount of Front and Back individually.
8 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Application Selection Screen.
9 Select additional Application functions, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
9 - 49
Section 9 : Applications
Image Shift (continued)
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
3
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
Position Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
FACE DOWN on Platen Glass
Position original(s) FACE UP in document feeder or FACE DOWN on platen glass.
Hint:
When using Platen memory copy, position original(s) on the platen glass and press [STORE] to
scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-27.
When using RADF memory copy, position original(s) in the document feeder and press [STORE]
to scan. See p. 6-28 ~ p. 6-29.
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view the selection and make a Proof copy; then touch EXIT to return to the
Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
After copying is completed, touch Image Shift on the
Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET] to
release the mode and reset the machine.
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9 - 50
Section 9 : Applications
Overlay
Use this function to scan an image, then overlay the image onto each page copied in the
job.
Specifications for Overlay
❒ Scan and store originals into memory.
❒ Memory copy is available.
❒ APS and AMS are automatically released.
❒ Magnification is initially set 1:1, though changeable.
❒ RADF APS detects size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*1, 8.5"x11"
❒ Platen APS detects size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*2, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*3, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11"
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: APS, AMS, Group, Folding/Stapling & Folding
with Booklet
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, OHP
Interleave, Image Insert, Dual page, Program Job, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat,
Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Thin/Thick Paper
NOTE:
*1: A5 original is available in both landscape (
) and portrait (
) only.
*2: A5 original is available in landscape orientation (
*3: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
1st scanned original
Originals scanned
2nd and later
) orientation.
Image Shift
Copies in Overlay mode
Overlay
9
Applications
Procedure
1
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Overlay. The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.
The [STORE] light goes on.
Application Selection Screen
9 - 51
Section 9 : Applications
Overlay (continued)
3 Select additional copying features, as desired.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
5 APS and AMS will be released. Set the desired Copy mode, Copy density, Lens
mode, and Paper size on the Basic Screen.
2
Enter Print Quantity
Enter Print Quantity, using keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [CLEAR QTY.] and enter
the correct quantity.
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
3
Position Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
FACE DOWN on Platen Glass
1 Position one original to be scanned in the document feeder or on the platen glass.
TA
2 Press [STORE].
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
9 - 52
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
Section 9 : Applications
Overlay (continued)
3 The second and subsequent pages are to be overlaid in printing. Place them in the
document feeder or on the platen glass, then press [STORE].
IMPORTANT: PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF
PAGINATION.
NOTE:
TA
When all the pages can be fed by the document feeder, set and
place them all as described above, then press [STORE].
Option:
Press [CHECK] to view selection, and make the Proof copy, if
desired; then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen. See p. 636 to p. 6-39.
SPECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
ROTATION OFF
STORE
CHECK
JOB ME
AUTO R
Overlay
4
Start Copying
Press [START PRINT].
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/
CLEAR].
To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press
[STOP/CLEAR] then [AUTO RESET].
After copying is completed, touch Overlay on the
Application Selection Screen or press [AUTO RESET] to
release the mode and reset the machine.
9
Applications
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
ST
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
CAUTION
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected,
remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9 - 53
Section 10: Job Memory
Job Store
Job Recall
Job Memory Form
Job Store
Job Recall
Job Memory
Form
10
Job
Memory
Section 10 : Job Memory
Job Store
Use Job Store to store up to 15 frequently-used copying jobs, which can be recalled at any
time. The stored jobs can be given alphabetical names.
❒ All copying functions can be selected
❒ Interrupt mode cannot be used while in Job Memory
Procedure
1 Make job selections from the Basic Screen, Application Selection Screen, Original
Scanning Condition Screen and/or Output Selection Screen.
2 When all selections are made, press [JOB MEMORY] to display the Job Store/Recall
Selection Screen.
3 Touch STORE. The Job Store Check Screen displays to enable you to review the
settings. Touching CANCEL on the Job Store Check Screen returns to the Basic
Screen.
Job Store/Recall Selection Screen
Control Penel
TANDEM
P
L ORIGINAL
LICATION
TION OFF
TORE
CHECK
HELP
JOB MEMORY
AUTO RESET
Job Store Check Screen
4 If settings are correct, touch OK to display the Job No. Selection Screen.
Otherwise, touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen, and make new selections.
10 - 2
Section 10 : Job Memory
Job Store (continued)
5 When the Job No. Selection Screen is displayed, touch one of the keys numbered
from 1~15 to store the job under that number. Arrow keys can be used to scroll
through the 15 job numbers. The selected number key will be highlighted.
If you wish to cancel this selection, touch CANCEL to restore the Basic Screen,
which displays the settings for the job. If you wish to cancel the settings, press [AUTO/
RESET].
6 Touch OK on the Job No. Selection Screen to display the Job Name Registration
Screen.
If you do not wish to enter a name, touch OK.
The key displays [* * * * * *] in place of a name.
Job No. Selection Screen
Job Name Registration Screen
Job Store
7 Enter a job name in up to 6 characters, using the touch screen alphabet keypad.
To correct an entry, touch DELETE repeatedly to delete each character entered,
then enter the correct job name.
8 If the Job name is correct, touch OK to resume the Job No. Selection Screen.
To re-enter the Job name, touch CANCEL to return to the Job Name Registration
Screen.
9 When the Job No. Selection Screen is displayed, touch OK to complete the setting
and return to the Basic Screen.
NOTES:
1
2
3
4
5
6
A locked job is indicated by a lock icon (
) on the Job key number.
Only the key operator can lock a job.
A locked job cannot be overwritten unless it is unlocked by the key operator.
A blank key indicates that no job is stored under that key.
[* * * * * *] displayed on a Job number key indicates that a job is stored but unnamed.
Job Memory entries can be recorded on the Job Memory Form included at the end of this
section.
10 - 3
10
Job
Memory
Section 10 : Job Memory
Job Recall
Use Job Recall to recall jobs that are already stored in Job Memory.
❒ Interrupt mode cannot be used while in Job Memory
Procedure
1 Place original(s) as required for the job you are about to recall.
2 Press [JOB MEMORY] to display the Job Store/Recall Selection Screen.
3 Touch RECALL to display the Job No. Selection Screen.
Job Store/Recall Selection Screen
Control Penel
TANDEM
P
L ORIGINAL
LICATION
TION OFF
TORE
CHECK
HELP
JOB MEMORY
AUTO RESET
Job No. Selection Screen
4 Touch a Job No. key to select a job you want to recall, and to highlight the key.
If required, scroll with the left or right arrows to reach the desired Job No. key (1~15).
To cancel the recall mode, touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen.
10 - 4
Section 10 : Job Memory
Job Recall (continued)
5 Touch JOB CHECK. The Job Recall Check Screen displays to enable you to review
the settings. Touching CANCEL on the Job Recall Check Screen returns to the Job
No. Selection Screen.
Job No. Selection Screen
Job Recall Check Screen
6 When the desired Job No. key is highlighted, touch OK to complete the setting, and
to return to the Basic Screen.
To cancel the job, press [AUTO/RESET].
7 Press [START PRINT].
Job Recall
10
Job
Memory
NOTES:
1
2
3
4
5
6
A locked job is indicated by a lock icon (
) on the Job key number.
Only the key operator can lock a job.
A locked job cannot be overwritten unless it is unlocked by the key operator.
A blank key indicates that no job is stored under that key.
[* * * * * *] displayed on a Job number key indicates that a job is stored but unnamed.
Job Memory entries can be recorded on the Job Memory Form included at the end of this
section.
10 - 5
Section 10 : Job Memory
Job Memory Form
Make a copy of this form to record frequently-used copy jobs stored in Job Memory.
Update the information when changes are made. Make additional copies, as needed.
JOB NUMBER/NAME
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
10 - 6
JOB DESCRIPTION
Section 11: Tandem Mode
Operation in Tandem Mode
To Stop Scanning/Printing
Troubleshooting
11
Tandem
Mode
Section 11 : Tandem Mode
Operation in Tandem Mode
The tandem kit is used to enable your primary (master) copier to work in tandem with a
secondary (sub) copier for the purpose of providing faster completion of large copying
jobs. Two units working in tandem distribute a job in half the time of non-tandem mode.
When using the tandem mode, all copying selections are made on the primary copier.
Tandem Mode Specifications
❒ The copier with [MODE] pressed will be the primary (master) copier.
Select the copying conditions and scan originals on the primary copier.
❒ The 7065 is provided with an Allocation recovery mode, which functions when trouble
occurs in either the primary or secondary copier. This allows the trouble-free copier to
complete the job.
❒ Auto reset/Auto shut-off will not function while tandem mode is selected.
❒ When the two copiers in tandem mode have the same EKC password registered, copying
will be available by entering the EKC password in the primary copier only. The password
will be transmitted to the secondary copier.
❒ When either copier is set to stop copying immediately after the copy limit is reached, the
available copier will take over the rest of the copying job.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Group, Rotation, Alternate Exit
❒ Incompatible Original Scanning Conditions: Resolution (Very high), Mixed Original
❒ Incompatible Applications: OHP Interleave, Repeat, Program Job, Non-image Area
Erase
Procedure
1
Turn Power ON ... Both Copiers
1 Turn power on by pressing the Power switches of the
two copiers with the tandem kit installed.
2 Confirm that both copiers are ready to copy with the Basic
Screen displayed.
2
Set Copying Conditions
1 Press [MODE] on the control panel of either copier.
The copier with [MODE] pressed will become the primary
copier; the other copier will function as the secondary
copier.
COPY
PRINTER
TANDEM
ECIAL ORIGINAL
APPLICATION
OTATION OFF
STORE
11 - 2
PRINT
CHECK
HELP
JOB MEMORY
AUTO RESET
RE
Section 11 : Tandem Mode
Operation in Tandem Mode (continued)
2 When [MODE] is pressed, the following icons display on the Basic Screen of both
copiers to indicate that the two units are ready to work in tandem mode.
Basic Screen (primary copier)
Basic Screen (secondary copier)
NOTE:
The tandem mode will not be selected in the cases shown below. The message “No response
from sub machine,” “Please check sub machine,” or “Tandem mode is not available” will be
displayed, as required.
• Either copier is turned off.
• Either copier demonstrates a J-code, E-code, F-code or a lack of paper.
• Both copiers fail to display the Basic Screen.
• Either copier is in the process of copying.
• When the EKC password of the primary copier is not registered with the secondary copier,
either (a) register the primary copier’s EKC password to the secondary copier, or (b) enter the
secondary copier’s EKC password to the primary copier’s password list.
Reminder for either the primary or secondary copier!
DO NOT turn either copier’s power off and then back on. The tandem mode will be released
automatically.
3 Select the desired copying conditions on the primary copier.
NOTE:
Optional features, such as Finisher functions, are available only when they are installed on both
copiers.
11
3
Enter Print Quantity
Enter print quantity on the primary copier, using the keypad.
When a print quantity amount of 100 is entered, the primary
and secondary copiers will each copy and output 50 sheets.
Tandem
Mode
TER
NDEM
PRINT QUANTITY
INTER
NOTES:
• Print quantity must be set for [2] or more copies to activate the
tandem mode.
• When the print quantity entered is an odd number, the primary
copier will copy and output one sheet/set more than the
secondary copier to accommodate the job.
PROOF
HELP
MORY
ESET
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START
11 - 3
Section 11 : Tandem Mode
Operation in Tandem Mode (continued)
4
Position Originals ... FACE UP in RADF
FACE DOWN on Platen Glass
Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass of the primary copier.
Hint:
In Tandem mode copying, Platen memory copy or RADF memory copy is also available. Position
original(s) on the platen glass or in the document feeder of the primary copier, then press [STORE]
to scan. See p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-29.
Option:
Press [CHECK] on the control panel of the primary copier to view the selection, and make a Proof
copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-36 to p. 6-39.
5
Start Tandem Mode Copying
Press [START PRINT] on the control panel of the primary
copier. The two copiers will start working in tandem.
The tandem mode will be released automatically when the
primary copier transmits the scanned image data and print
quantity to be assigned to the secondary copier.
PRINT QUANTITY
INTERRUPT
PROOF COPY
STO
RECALL CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
NOTE:
If scanning of the next reserved job is operated during the tandem mode copying, that job will also
be operated in the tandem mode.
11 - 4
Section 11 : Tandem Mode
To Stop Scanning/Printing
To stop scanning:
Press [STOP/CLEAR] on the control panel of the primary
copier. The scanning job will stop and the tandem mode
will be released.
TIMER
NTITY
INTERRUPT
POWER SAV
ON / OFF
PROOF COPY
To stop printing:
Press [STOP/CLEAR] on the control panel of the primary
copier or the secondary copier. The printing job will stop in
the copier with [STOP/CLEAR] pressed, and the other copier
will continue copying until the assigned quantity is reached.
To stop printing in the both copiers, press [STOP/CLEAR]
of both copiers.
NOTES:
STOP / CLEAR
L CLEAR QTY.
START PRINT
• Auto reset/Auto shut-off will not function while tandem mode is selected.
• Allocation recovery mode will not function when [STOP/CLEAR] is pressed.
Troubleshooting
Copying With/Without the Allocation Recovery Mode
The Allocation recovery mode enables you to complete your copying job even when
trouble occurs in either the primary or secondary copier, such as a paper jam. In that case,
the copier that is trouble free completes the job. Contact your service centre, if you do not
require this function.
When a J-code, E-code, F-code or unloaded paper occurs on either the primary or
secondary copier and the Allocation recovery mode has been set beforehand,
The copier that is trouble free handles the remaining print quantity and completes the
job.
When the job is completed, take the appropriate troubleshooting measures to correct
the problem.
When a J-code, E-code or F-code occurs on either the primary or secondary copier and
the Allocation recovery mode has NOT been set beforehand,
Both copiers will stop copying. At that time, take the appropriate troubleshooting
measures to correct the problem, then press [START PRINT] to complete the job.
Reminder for either the primary or secondary copier!
DO NOT turn either copier’s power off and then back on. The tandem mode will be released
automatically.
11 - 5
11
Tandem
Mode
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
To the Key Operator
How to Access the Key Operator Mode
Function Menu Map
Initial Setting Mode [1]
How to Access the Initial Setting Mode
Copy Mode [1]
Copy Density [2]
Lens Mode [3]
Paper Tray [4]
Output [5]
Staple [6]
Image Scan [7]
Lens Mode Ratio [2]
EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [3]
How to Access the EKC Setting Mode
Entering and Amending Passwords/User Name [1]
Entering Account Limits [2]
Resetting the Accounts [3]
Switching the EKC On or Off [4]
Select Effect of Reaching the Copy Limit [5]
Data Printing Mode
Lock / Delete Job Memory [4]
Paper Type [5]
Control Panel Contrast [6]
Key Operator Telephone Number [7]
Weekly Timer [8]
How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode
Weekly Timer On/Off Setting [1]
Summer Time Setting [2]
Date & Time Setting [3]
Timer Setting [4]
Timer Action On/Off Setting [5]
Lunch Hour Off Setting [6]
Timer Interrupt Password Setting [7]
Memory Switch [9]
Control Panel Adjustment [10]
Auto Low Power / Auto Shut Off [11]
Call Remote Service Centre [12]
Save EKC Data to Memory Card [13]
Key Operator EKC Form
To the Key
Operator
Function
Menu Map
Initial
Setting Mode
Lens Mode
Ratio
EKC
Lock/Delete
Job Memory
Paper Type
Control Panel
Contrast
Key Operator
Telephone No.
Weekly Timer
Memory
Switch
Control Panel
Adjustment
Auto Low Power/
Auto Shut Off
Call Remote
Service Centre
Save EKC
Data
Key Operator
EKC Form
12
Key Operator
Mode
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
To the Key Operator
The key operator is trained to handle all special key operator functions that are not
accessible to the general user, such as monitoring overall copier activity, machine
performance, and service information; modifying machine settings; and controlling user
activity, for billing purposes.
A unique 4-digit key operator password is normally set by service at installation. If the
unique code is not set by service, the copier will not display Key Operator Password Entry
Screen when the Key Operator mode is being accessed, and a key operator password will
not be required. A service-set 8-digit EKC master key code must be entered by the key
operator to access the Electronic Key Counter functions, and a service-set 4-digit Weekly
timer master key code must be entered by the key operator to access the Weekly timer
functions.
To ensure the security of Key Operator mode, it is recommended that you establish
a unique key operator password, along with the key operator EKC master key
code and Weekly timer master key code, and keep them in a confidential file.
❒ HELP is unavailable in the Key Operator Mode
Key Operator Password Entry Screen
COPY
PRINTER
TANDEM
CHECK
HELP
Key Operator Mode Screen
JOB MEMORY
AUTO RESET
NOTE:
The function number [12] Call remote service centre and [13] Save EKC data to memory card on
the Key Operator Mode Screen will be dimmed and cannot be selected on the copier without the
remote diagnostics activated.
12 - 2
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
To the Key Operator (continued)
How to Access the Key Operator Mode
Procedure
1 First, be sure the copier power switch is OFF.
2 Then, turn power back ON whilst pressing [HELP].
The Key Operator Password Entry Screen displays when the 4-digit key operator
password is set by service.
Otherwise, the Key Operator Mode Screen displays without the password requirement.
3 If the Key Operator Password Entry Screen is displayed, use the keypad on the
touch screen to enter your 4-digit key operator password; then touch OK, to display
the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
If the key operator password is not valid, check with your service representative.
4 To display menus [11] to [13] of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the lower
arrow key. To return the menu [1] to [10] of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the
upper arrow key.
To the Key
Operator
5 Make setting changes from the Key Operator Mode Screen, as described on the
following pages.
12
Key Operator
Mode
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 3
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Function Menu Map
FUNCTION MENU
SUB FUNCTION MENU AND SETTING OPTIONS
[1] Initial setting
[1] Copy mode: [RADF; 1s1; 1s2; 2s2; 2s1]
[2] Copy density: [AE; manual]
[3] Lens mode: [AMS; ratio 0.33~4.00]
[4] Paper tray: [APS; trays 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or Multi-sheet bypass
tray]
[5] Output: [sort; group; staple-sort]
[6] Staple: [Normal 1 position left; Normal 1 position right; Normal
2 positions left; Normal 2 positions right; Upsidedown 1
position left; Upsidedown 1 position right; Upsidedown 2
positions left; Upsidedown 2 positions right]
[7] Image scan: [Normal mode; High mode; Very High mode]
[2] Lens mode ratio
[User Set ratio]
[3] EKC
[1] Entering and amending Passwords/User name
[2] Entering account Limits
[3] Resetting the accounts
[4] Switching the EKC On or Off
[5] Select effect of reaching the copy limit
[4] Lock/delete
job memory
[1] Lock Job memory
[2] Delete Job memory
[5] Paper type
[Blue; Red; Brown; Chlorine; Letterhead; Green; Yellow;
Recycle; Blank]
[6] Control panel
contrast
[Dimmer; Brighter]
[7] Key operator
Tel. No.
[5-digit number]
[8] Weekly timer
[1] Weekly timer On/Off setting
[2] Summer time setting
[3] Date & Time setting
[4] Timer setting
[5] Timer action On/Off setting
[6] Lunch hour Off setting
[7] Timer interrupt password setting
12 - 4
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Function Menu Map (continued)
FUNCTION MENU
[9] Memory switch
SUB FUNCTION MENU AND SETTING OPTIONS
[1] Auto reset timer
[2] AUTO RESET key function
[3] RADF-Original effect
[4] Erasure outside area of original
[5] RADF frame erasure selection
[6] Automatic tray switching
[7] Platen APS
[8] RADF APS
[9] ATS/APS switch (Tray 1)
[10] ATS/APS switch (Tray 2)
[11] ATS/APS switch (Tray 3)
[12] ATS/APS switch (Tray 4)
[13] ATS/APS switch (Tray 5)
[14] APS switch (Bypass)
[15] Platen AMS
[16] RADF AMS
[17] Staple mode reset-function
[18] Key click sound
[19] Job memory auto recall function
[20] Tray setting: Sheet Insertion
[21] A5, B6 size original type
[22] A3, B4, 11x17 size original type
[23] Rotation
[24] 1 SHOT indication time
[25] Power save screen
Function
Menu Map
[10] Control panel adjustment
[11] Auto Low PowerAuto Shut off
Auto low power timer: [5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 90, 120, 240]
Auto shut off timer: [30, 60, 90, 120, 240]
Auto shut off: [On, Off]
[12] Call remote service centre
[1] Call for JAM concerns
[2] Call for SC concerns
[3] Call for toner bottle supply
[4] Call for paper supply
[5] Call for image quality
[6] Call for others
12
Key Operator
Mode
[13] Save EKC data to memory card
12 - 5
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Initial Setting Mode [1]
Initial settings are the settings that display automatically when the copier is powered on,
when Auto/Reset timer is operated, or when [AUTO RESET] key is pressed. These settings
can be changed by the key operator, as shown in this section.
Initially, i.e., at installation, the Basic Screen displays the following condition to meet
Energy Star requirements:
Initial Setting
Copy Mode: 1s1
Copy Density: AE
Lens Mode: 1:1
Paper Tray: APS
Finisher: ON
When Initial settings are changed by the key operator, the new initial settings display
when the copier is powered on, when Auto/Reset timer is reached, or when [AUTO RESET]
key is pressed.
The following initial settings can be changed by the key operator:
Copy mode: [RADF; 1s1; 1s2; 2s2; 2s1]
Copy density: [AE; manual]
Lens mode: [AMS; ratio 0.33~4.00]
Paper tray: [APS; trays 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or Multi-sheet bypass tray]
Output: [sort; group; staple-sort ]
Setting procedures are described on the following pages.
The Full-Automatic Mode Screen described on pages 3-6 & 6-2 can be made to display
initially through the Key Operator mode, i.e., instead of Basic Screen. All Full-Automatic
Mode settings shown in the example below can be changed by the key operator in the
Initial Settings menu. Print Quantity cannot be changed.
Copy Mode: 1s1
Copy Density: AE
Lens Mode: 1:1
Paper Tray: APS
NOTE:
The most commonly-used settings are established at installation. Before changing any of the
copier settings, be sure that you understand the overall and long-range effect of the change.
12 - 6
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Initial Setting Mode [1] (continued)
How to Access the Initial Setting Mode
Key Operator Mode Screen
Initial Setting Menu Screen
Initial
Setting Mode
Procedure
1 From power off condition: Turn the copier power switch ON, while pressing [HELP].
If a 4-digit key operator password is set by service, the Key Operator Password Entry
Screen is displayed.
2 Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4-digit key operator password,
then touch OK.
The Key Operator Mode Screen will be displayed. (See note.)
3 Touch [1] Initial setting, to display the Initial Setting Menu Screen.
4 Touch the key for the setting you want to change, and follow instructions displayed
on the screen, touching OK to complete the setting. (See the following setting
procedures.)
5 When initial setting changes are completed, exit the Key Operator mode by turning
the copier power switch OFF.
6 After a few seconds, turn the copier power switch ON for normal user operations.
12
Key Operator
Mode
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 7
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Initial Setting Mode [1] (continued)
Copy Mode [1]
Set Copy mode to occur after power on or after Auto/Reset occurs.
❒ Setting options: RADF; 1s1; 1s2; 2s2; 2s1
Initial Setting Menu Screen
Copy Mode Initial Setting Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 Touch [1] Initial setting to display the Initial Setting Menu Screen, then touch [1]
Copy mode to display the Copy Mode Initial Setting Screen. The default setting is
RADF with 1s1 mode.
3 Touch the setting you want for the initial condition of the copier.
If 2s2 or 2s1 mode is selected, RADF will also be selected, automatically. In this
case, the RADF must be in a closed position when power is turned ON, or when
Auto/Reset is functioning. Otherwise, the message “Please close RADF” will be
displayed.
4 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 7.
5 If other initial setting changes are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the Initial Setting Menu Screen. Touch desired key, from [1]~[7].
6 If no other initial settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
7 Turn power OFF.
8 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 8
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Initial Setting Mode [1] (continued)
Copy Density [2]
Set Copy density to be effective after power on or after Auto/Reset occurs.
❒ Setting options: AE; manual
❒ Increase Contrast cannot be set as an initial condition
Initial Setting Menu Screen
Copy Density Initial Setting Screen
Initial
Setting Mode
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 Touch [1] Initial setting to display the Initial Setting Menu Screen.
3 Touch [2] Copy density to display the Copy Density Initial Setting Screen. The default
setting is AE.
4 Touch AE to select AE mode, or touch the density level required.
Nine exposure levels are displayed.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8.
6 If other initial setting changes are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the Initial Setting Menu Screen. Touch desired key, from [1]~[7].
7 If no other initial settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
8 Turn power OFF.
9 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
12
Key Operator
Mode
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 9
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Initial Setting Mode [1] (continued)
Lens Mode [3]
Set the Lens mode ratio you initially want to display after the user turns the power on or
after Auto/Reset restores the Initial settings.
NOTICE:
This setting should not conflict with the Initial setting for Paper Tray. For example, if APS is
selected for the initial paper tray setting, a ratio setting other than AMS will be ignored.
❒ Setting options: AMS; ratio 0.33~4.00
Initial Setting Menu Screen
Lens Mode Initial Setting Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 Touch [1] Initial setting to display the Initial Setting Menu Screen.
3 Touch [3] Lens mode to display the Lens Mode Initial Setting Screen. The default
setting is 1.00.
4 Select the desired setting from the Lens Mode Initial Setting Screen:
To select 1.00 if it is not already displayed, touch AMS, then touch PREVIOUS
SCREEN.
To select another ratio, enter a 3-digit ratio using the touch screen keypad.
To select AMS, touch AMS. “-A-” will be displayed in the window.
5 Touch OK to complete the setting.
6 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9.
7 If other initial setting changes are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the Initial Setting Menu Screen. Touch desired key, from [1]~[7].
8 If no other initial settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
9 Turn power OFF.
10 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 10
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Initial Setting Mode [1] (continued)
Paper Tray [4]
Set paper tray priority to be in effect after power is turned on or after Auto/Reset occurs.
This function sets tray priority, not paper size priority. Therefore, if paper size is changed
in the tray, the tray will still remain the priority tray.
NOTICE:
The initial paper tray setting should not conflict with the initial setting for Lens Mode. For example,
if AMS is selected for the initial lens mode setting, the initial setting for paper tray priority will be
ignored.
❒ Setting options: APS; trays 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or Multi-sheet bypass tray
Initial
Setting Mode
Initial Setting Menu Screen
Paper Tray Initial Setting Screen (without LT-352)
Paper Tray Initial Setting Screen (with LT-352)
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 Touch [1] Initial setting to display the Initial Setting Menu Screen.
3 Touch [4] Paper tray to display the Paper Tray Initial Setting Screen. The default
setting is APS.
4 Touch APS, or touch any tray key to select a specific tray.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8.
6 If other initial setting changes are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the Initial Setting Menu Screen. Touch desired key, from [1]~[7].
7 If no other initial settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
8 Turn power OFF.
9 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 11
12
Key Operator
Mode
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Initial Setting Mode [1] (continued)
Output [5]
Set initial Output mode of the Finisher to be effective after power is turned on or after Auto/
Reset occurs.
❒ Setting options: Sort; group; staple-sort
Initial Setting Menu Screen
Output Mode Initial Setting Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 Touch [1] Initial setting to display the Initial Setting Menu Screen.
3 Touch [5] Output to display the Output Mode Initial Setting Screen. The default
setting is SORT.
4 Touch SORT, GROUP, or STAPLE, to select the initial Output mode.
If STAPLE is selected, SORT is automatically selected.
If an Output mode is incompatible, the key will appear dimmed.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8.
6 If other initial setting changes are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the Initial Setting Menu Screen. Touch desired key, from [1]~[7].
7 If no other initial settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
8 Turn power OFF.
9 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 12
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Initial Setting Mode [1] (continued)
Staple [6]
Set the stapling position in the Staple-sort mode of the Finisher, to be effective after power
is turned on or after Auto/Reset occurs.
The Finish setting is available even if the copier is not mounted with a Finisher, or the
Staple-sort mode is not selected as an initial setting of the Output mode.
❒ Setting options: Normal 1 position left; Normal 1 position right; Normal 2 positions left;
Normal 2 positions right; Upsidedown 1 position left; Upsidedown 1 position right;
Upsidedown 2 positions left; Upsidedown 2 positions right
Initial Setting Menu Screen
Staple Location Initial Setting Screen (FS-106)
Initial
Setting Mode
Staple Location Initial Setting Screen (FS-108BM)
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 Touch [1] Initial setting to display the Initial Setting Menu Screen.
3 Touch [6] Staple to display the Staple Location Initial Setting Screen. The default
setting is auto 1 position.
4 Touch the desired location on the Staple Location Initial Setting Screen.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8.
6 If other initial setting changes are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the Initial Setting Menu Screen. Touch desired key, from [1]~[7].
7 If no other initial settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
8 Turn power OFF.
9 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 13
12
Key Operator
Mode
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Initial Setting Mode [1] (continued)
Image Scan [7]
Set one of the three Image scan mode after power is turned on or after Auto/Reset occurs.
NOTICE:
Selecting Very high mode as initial setting will drastically affect many other copying functions that
can be selected after power is turned on or after Auto/Reset occurs. Please check the incompatible
functions with Very high mode on p. 8-5.
❒ Setting options: Normal mode, High mode, Very High mode
Initial Setting Menu Screen
Image Scan Initial Setting Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 Touch [1] Initial setting to display the Initial Setting Menu Screen.
3 Touch [7] Image scan to display the Image Scan Initial Setting Screen. The default
setting is Normal mode.
4 Touch Normal mode, High mode, or Very High mode.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8.
6 If other initial setting changes are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the Initial Setting Menu Screen. Touch desired key, from [1]~[7].
7 If no other initial settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
8 Turn power OFF.
9 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 14
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Lens Mode Ratio [2]
USERSET ratios are used to reduce and enlarge the original image to accommodate
copy paper size, and are available when Lens Mode is selected from the Basic Screen.
These ratios may be changed by the key operator as shown below.
❒ Setting options: User Set
Key Operator Mode Screen
Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen
Initial
Setting Mode
Lens Mode
Ratio
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 Touch [2] Lens mode ratio to display Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen.
3 Touch one of the USERSET ratios you want to change, then enter a ratio from 0.33
~ 4.00, using the keypad.
If a ratio under 0.33 is entered, 0.33 will be displayed.
If a ratio over 4.00 is entered, 4.00 will be displayed.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 7.
6 If other key operator settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the
Key Operator Mode Screen.
7 Turn power OFF.
8 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
12
Key Operator
Mode
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 15
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [3]
This function can only be accessed by the key operator after a 8-digit EKC master key
code is entered. The Electronic Key Counter allows you to monitor all copying activity by
controlling EKC password accounts.
This feature can track copier usage for individual users and/or accounts as well as limit
access to the copier to authorized users. Copy quantity limits for specific accounts can
also be set. Use the EKC Key Operator Form provided at the end of this section to record
EKC password information.
The EKC stores up to 256 EKC passwords, each of which represents a separate account
that can be used for billing and recordkeeping. The number of users assigned to each
EKC password may depend upon the billing system in operation and the number of
individuals and departments using the copier. When the EKC is activated, copying can be
performed only after a valid 5-digit EKC password is entered.
Copy quantity for each password, copy limit for each password, and copy quantity for
each paper size can be visually confirmed in print.
If EKC needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service centre.
The following EKC settings can be made:
[1] Entering and Amending Passwords/User Name:
Create up to 256 individual EKC passwords of 00000~99999 and user name.
[2] Entering Account Limits:
Limit copy count for each password to a max. 999,999 copies.
[3] Resetting the Accounts:
Read and clear the copy count and copy count limit for all or selected passwords.
When each account is reset, the copy will automatically reset to zero.
[4] Switching the EKC On or Off:
Select the function to be on or off. The initial setting is Off.
[5] Select Effect of Reaching the Copy Limit:
Set the machine condition when the copy limit is reached to stop immediately; or after
a job is completed.
12 - 16
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [3] (continued)
How to Access the EKC Setting Mode
Key Operator Mode Screen
EKC Master Key Code Screen
EKC
EKC Setting Menu Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
If the key operator password is not valid, check with your service centre.
2 Touch [3] EKC. The EKC Master Key Code Screen displays, if a code is required.
3 Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 8-digit EKC master key code, then
touch OK to display the EKC Setting Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
4 Select the desired EKC function, and make settings, as required.
To exit the EKC mode, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on EKC Setting Menu Screen.
5 To exit the Key Operator mode, turn the main power switch OFF.
12
Key Operator
Mode
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code. The
EKC master key code can be set to less than 8 digits by the Service setting.
12 - 17
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [3] (continued)
Entering and Amending Passwords/User Name [1]
Create up to 256 individual EKC passwords, from 00000~99999. Use the following
procedure to create new or change existing EKC passwords.
❒ EKC Password No.: Password No. from 000~255, designated by key operator.
❒ EKC Password: Unique 5-digit numeric code programmed by key operator for user.
❒ SEARCH EKC PASSWORD: An EKC password scrolling key used to check EKC
password status quickly.
❒ User Name: Max. 8 character can be entered.
EKC Setting Menu Screen
Input Password Screen 1
Input Password Screen 2
Input User Name Screen
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [3] EKC. The EKC Master Key Code Screen displays, if a code is required.
3 Enter your 8-digit EKC master key code, then touch OK to display the EKC Setting
Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code.
12 - 18
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [3] (continued)
Entering and Amending Passwords/User Name [1] (continued)
4 Touch [1] Entering and amending Passwords/User name to display the Input
Password Screen.
5 Set No. key will be highlighted, enabling you to immediately enter an EKC password
No.
6 Enter a 3-digit EKC password No. from 000~255 using the keypad or arrows. The
No. will be displayed in the second line of the message area.
7 Touch OK. The Set Password will be highlighted, enabling you to immediately enter
an EKC password.
8 Enter an 5-digit EKC password using the keypad on the touch screen.
NOTE:
Do not enter “00000”. The initial EKC password value is “00000”.
The EKC password will be displayed in the second line of the message area.
9 Touch OK to display SEARCH PASSWORD.
10 Touch SEARCH PASSWORD to check that the input EKC password is not duplicated.
When the same EKC password has not been used for another account number,
“Password not used / Press ‘Set No.’ ” will be displayed.
If searching is not necessary, simply proceed to step 11.
When the same EKC password has been used for another account number, “Password
has been used, Input new one” will be displayed.
Enter an 5-digit EKC password again, touch OK, and touch SEARCH PASSWORD.
NOTE:
EKC
It is possible to assign the same EKC password to different account numbers. Note, however, that
the number of copies will be counted only for the EKC password with the smallest account number.
Copy count for the other accounts will not be monitored. We recommend you do not use duplicate
EKC password.
11 Check the account number and EKC password displayed in the second line of the
message display.
NOTE:
We recommend that you make a list of all EKC passwords and account numbers.
12 If you want to input the user name for the EKC password, touch Set User Name to
display the Input User Name Screen. Input desired name.
NOTE:
Max. 8 characters can be entered. If an invalid user name is entered, touch DELETE to delete it,
then enter the valid name.
Touch OK to return to the Input Password Screen.
13 Touch Set No. if you want to enter another EKC password.
14 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 17.
15 If other EKC setting changes are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the EKC Setting Menu Screen. Touch desired key, from [1]~[5].
16 If no other EKC settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
17 Turn power OFF.
18 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
12 - 19
12
Key Operator
Mode
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [3] (continued)
Entering Account Limits [2]
Use this setting to limit copy count to a maximum of 999,999 copies for each EKC password.
EKC Setting Menu Screen
Set No. Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [3] EKC. The EKC Master Key Code Screen displays, if a code is required.
3 Enter your 8-digit EKC master key code, then touch OK to display the EKC Setting
Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
4 Touch [2] Entering account limits to display the Set No. Screen.
Set No. is highlighted, enabling you to immediately enter a 3-digit EKC password No.
for the purpose of confirming the EKC count and limit.
5 Use the keypad or arrows to enter an EKC password No. from 000~255, then touch
OK to display the copy count and copy limit for that EKC password. To set a copy
limit for the EKC password, go to Step 6.
Or, just read the copy count, and record it for billing purposes. If desired, use the
keypad to enter additional EKC passwords to be read, touching OK after each entry.
When you are through reading the copy count for each EKC password entered,
proceed to step 11.
6 To set the copy limit for that EKC password, touch Set Limit.
7 Use the touch screen keypad to enter a 6-digit copy count limit.
8 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 11.
9 If other EKC setting changes are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the EKC Setting Menu Screen. Touch desired key, from [1]~[5].
10 If no other EKC settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
11 Turn power OFF.
12 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code.
12 - 20
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [3] (continued)
Resetting the Accounts [3]
Reset EKC count of individual EKC password Nos. or reset the count for all EKC password
Nos.
❒ Setting options: Reset Individual Counters or Reset All Counters
EKC Setting Menu Screen
Reset EKC Count Screen
EKC
Reset Individual Counters Screen
Reset All EKC Counters Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [3] EKC. The EKC Master Key Code Screen displays, if a code is required.
3 Enter your 8-digit EKC master key code, then touch OK to display the EKC Setting
Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
4 Touch [3] Resetting the accounts to display the Reset EKC Count Screen.
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code.
12 - 21
12
Key Operator
Mode
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [3] (continued)
Resetting the Accounts [3] (continued)
5 Options: Touch Reset individual or Reset all counters.
To reset individual counters;
(1) Touch Reset individual to display the Reset Individual Counters Screen.
(2) Use keypad or arrows to enter the desired EKC password No.
(3) Touch OK to display count limit for the EKC password.
(4) Touch RESET to reset the count to zero for the EKC password No. The number
will be indicated in the second line of the message area.
To reset all counters;
(1) Touch Reset all counters to display the Reset All EKC Counters Screen.
(2) Touch YES to reset all counts to zero, and automatically return to the EKC Setting
Menu Screen. Or, touch NO.
6 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9.
7 If other EKC setting changes are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the EKC Setting Menu Screen. Touch desired key, from [1]~[5].
8 If no other EKC settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
9 Turn power OFF.
10 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
12 - 22
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [3] (continued)
Switching the EKC On or Off [4]
Use this function to turn EKC On or Off.
EKC Setting Menu Screen
EKC On/Off Setting Screen
EKC
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [3] EKC. The EKC Master Key Code Screen displays, if a code is required.
3 Enter your 8-digit EKC master key code, then touch OK to display the EKC Setting
Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
4 Touch [4] Switching the EKC On or Off to display the EKC On/Off Setting Screen.
5 Touch EKC On to activate EKC or touch EKC Off to de-activate EKC.
The selected key will be highlighted.
6 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9.
7 If other EKC setting changes are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the EKC Setting Menu Screen. Touch desired key, from [1]~[5].
8 If no other EKC settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
9 Turn power OFF.
10 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
12
Key Operator
Mode
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code.
12 - 23
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [3] (continued)
Select Effect of Reaching the Copy Limit [5]
Use this function to select whether the copier will stop when the count limit is reached, or
if the copier will complete the copy job before stopping when reaching maximum copy
count.
❒ Setting options: Immediately, After job, Warning
EKC Setting Menu Screen
Copy Limit Reached Effect Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [3] EKC. The EKC Master Key Code Screen displays, if a code is required.
3 Enter your 8-digit EKC master key code, then touch OK to display the EKC Setting
Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
4 Touch [5] Select effect of reaching the copy limit to display the Copy Limit Reached
Effect Screen.
5 Select setting option:
Touch Immediately to stop the copier when the copy limit is reached.
In this case, the paper in process will be completed, and Enter EKC password will
display after the copier stops.
Touch After job to stop the copier after the current job is completed, when copy limit
is reached.
Touch Warning to display the message that the limit has been reached.
6 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9.
7 If other EKC setting changes are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the EKC Setting Menu Screen. Touch desired key, from [1]~[5].
8 If no other EKC settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
9 Turn power OFF.
10 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code.
12 - 24
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [3] (continued)
Data Printing Mode
Use this function to print the following three types of data for confirmation.
❒ Data options: copy quantity for each password, copy limit for each password, copy
quantity for each paper size
Procedure
1 While pressing [P] and [9].
2 Press [START PRINT]. The following message will be displayed.
Enter E.K.C. master code
3 Enter your 8-digit EKC master key code. (See note.) The following message will be
displayed.
EKC
Data printing mode 1 (1 ~ 3)
Please switch OFF after printing
4 Print out the data of each mode.
To print out the data of copy quantity for each password, press [1] and [START
PRINT].
Data printing mode 1 (1 ~ 3)
Please switch OFF after printing
To print out the data of copy limit for each password, press [2] and [START PRINT].
Data printing mode 2 (1 ~ 3)
Please switch OFF after printing
To print out the data of copy quantity for each paper size, press [3] and [START
PRINT].
Data printing mode 3 (1 ~ 3)
Please switch OFF after printing
12
Key Operator
Mode
5 Turn power OFF.
NOTE:
If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code.
12 - 25
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Lock/Delete Job Memory [4]
Use this function to lock or delete a Job that has been programmed.
A locked Job is indicated by a lock icon on the job number of the Job Memory Lock
Screen.
The settings of a locked job cannot be changed.
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
Setting options: Lock Job memory; Delete Job memory
Lock/delete is available for all 15 stored jobs
Job lock is available only for named jobs
A blank key indicates that no job is programmed
* * * * * * indicates that a job is programmed but unnamed
Key Operator Mode Screen
Job Memory Menu Screen
Job Memory Lock Screen
Delete Job Memory Screen
12 - 26
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Lock/Delete Job Memory [4] (continued)
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 Touch [4] Lock/delete Job memory to display the Job Memory Menu Screen.
To lock a job memory;
(1) Touch [1] Lock Job memory to display the Job Memory Lock Screen.
(2) Use arrows to scroll to the desired job number.
(3) To lock a job that has no lock icon displayed on its key, touch the job number.
(4) To unlock a job that displays the lock icon, touch the job number.
To delete a job memory;
(1) Touch [2] Delete Job memory to display the Delete Job Memory Screen.
(2) Use arrows to scroll to the desired job number.
(3) Select the Job Number you wish to delete by touching it.
(4) Touch DELETE. Programs and the name are deleted from the job memory.
3 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 5.
4 If other key operator settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the
Key Operator Mode Screen.
5 Turn power OFF.
6 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
Lock/Delete
Job Memory
12
Key Operator
Mode
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 27
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Paper Type [5]
Use this function to indicate a specific paper type in the Paper Tray Selection Screen and
the lower message area on the Basic Screen . This is especially useful when special
paper is used on a regular basis and is always placed in a specific paper tray.
❒ The following paper types can be specified:
*(Blank) : Normal
BLUE : Blue
BRWN. : Brown
CHLR. : Chlorine
GREN. : Green
YELL. : Yellow
*: Blank refers to no indication of a paper.
Key Operator Mode Screen
RED
: Red
HEAD. : Letterhead
RECY. : Recycle
Paper Type Setting Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 Touch [5] Paper type to display the Paper Type Setting Screen.
3 Select and touch desired paper tray.
4 Touch the arrow keys to select paper type.
Blank
RECY.
CHLR.
HEAD.
BLUE
RED
GREN.
YELL.
BRWN.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 7.
6 If other key operator settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the
Key Operator Mode Screen.
7 Turn power OFF.
8 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 28
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Control Panel Contrast [6]
Use this feature to adjust the level of brightness of the touch screen portion of the control
panel.
Select Dimmer to make the touch screen contrast dimmer than currently displayed.
Select Brighter to make the touch screen contrast brighter than currently displayed.
❒ Setting options: Dimmer; Brighter
Key Operator Mode Screen
Control Panel Contrast Screen
Paper Type
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [6] Control panel contrast to display the Control Panel Contrast Screen.
3 Touch Dimmer or Brighter , as desired.
4 Touch OK to complete the selection.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 7.
6 If other key operator settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the
Key Operator Mode Screen.
7 Turn power OFF.
8 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
Control Panel
Contrast
12
Key Operator
Mode
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 The control panel contrast feature can be adjusted from the Help screen provided the feature
setting is activated by Service. When the Control panel contrast key is pressed, the Contrast
adjustment screen will be displayed. Contact your service centre if the feature is required.
12 - 29
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Key Operator Telephone Number [7]
Use this screen to enter the extension number of the key operator which is indicated on
the Basic Help Screen.
❒ Setting options: 5-digit key operator telephone extension
Key Operator Mode Screen
Key Operator Tel. No. Setting Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 Touch [7] Key operator tel. No. to display the Key Operator Tel. No. Setting Screen.
3 Enter an extension number from the keypad, using up to 5-digits.
4 Touch OK to confirm. If the number is less than 5 digits, use a hyphen [-].
The hyphen will be indicated as a space in the Help Screens.
If less than 5-digits are entered, the screen will not change when OK is touched.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 7.
6 If other key operator settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the
Key Operator Mode Screen.
7 Turn power OFF.
8 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 30
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [8]
This function can be accessed only by the key operator after a unique 4-digit Weekly timer
master key code is entered.
The Weekly Timer is a copier management function that shuts down power to the machine
on a daily or hourly basis, and can be programmed specifically for lunch breaks, weekends
and holidays, or any time the copier is not required.
In Addition, Timer Interrupt can be enabled (with or without a password requirement) to
allow temporary use of the machine during periods when power is shut down by the Timer
function.
Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer
• The power plug is inserted into the socket.
• The power switch is turned on.
• The current date and time are correctly set.
If the Weekly timer needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service centre.
The following Weekly timer settings can be made.
[1] Weekly Timer On/Off Setting
Enable and disable the Timer function
[2] Summer Time Setting
Set the Summer time setting.
Key Operator
Telephone No.
[3] Date & Time Setting
Set the current date and time.
Weekly Timer
[4] Timer Setting
Specify the times that the copier will turn ON and OFF for each day of the week or the
entire week.
[5] Timer Action On/Off Setting
Specify the working days of the machine by the Timer, for all Mondays through Sundays,
and/or individually for each day of the given month.
[6] Lunch Hour Off Setting
Specify the lunch time interval during which the copier will go off and on.
[7] Timer Interrupt Password Setting
Require Password entry for the Timer off function and establish the amount of usage
time.
NOTES:
1 The time is set in terms of the 24 hour clock, where hour [1] is the first hour after midnight; and
hour [24] is the hour of midnight. For example, 6 a.m. is 06:00 hours; 6 p.m. is 18:00 hours.
2 The [AUTO RESET] key is used to change numbers determined by the SET touch key, or to
exit from the timer setting mode.
3 The [STOP/CLEAR] key is used to return to the previous menu.
12 - 31
12
Key Operator
Mode
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [8] (continued)
How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode
Key Operator Mode Screen
Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [8] Weekly timer.
The Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen displays, if a code is required.
3 Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key
code, then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
4 Select the desired Weekly timer function, and make settings, as required.
5 To exit the Weekly timer mode, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer
Setting Menu Screen.
6 To exit the Key operator mode, turn the main power switch OFF.
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit
code.
12 - 32
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [8] (continued)
Weekly Timer On/Off Setting [1]
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [8] Weekly timer. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then touch
OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
3 Touch [1] Weekly timer On/Off setting to display the Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting
Screen.
4 Touch Weekly timer On to activate Weekly timer, or touch Weekly timer Off to deactivate Weekly timer. The usual setting is Weekly timer Off.
The selected key will be highlighted.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8.
6 If other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. Select another desired menu item, from
[1]~[7].
7 If no other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore
the Key Operator Mode Screen.
8 Turn power OFF.
9 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
Weekly Timer
12
Key Operator
Mode
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit
code.
12 - 33
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [8] (continued)
Summer Time Setting [2]
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Summer Time Setting Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [8] Weekly timer. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then touch
OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
3 Touch [2] Summer time setting to display the Summer Time Setting Screen.
4 Touch Summer time to activate summer time, or touch Normal to de-activate summer
time. The usual setting is Normal.
The selected key will be highlighted.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8.
6 If other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. Select another desired menu item, from
[1]~[7].
7 If no other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore
the Key Operator Mode Screen.
8 Turn power OFF.
9 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit
code.
12 - 34
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [8] (continued)
Date & Time Setting [3]
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Date & Time Setting Screen
Date & Time Input Screen
Weekly Timer
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [8] Weekly timer. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then touch
OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
3 Touch [3] Date & Time setting to display the Date & Time Setting Screen.
4 Touch Time setting to display the Date & Time Input Screen.
Input the year using touch screen keypad, and touch OK. (Setting example: year of
2002 is 02.)
Input similarly the month and time in order. (Setting example: Nov. is 11, and 6 p.m.
is 18.)
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8.
6 If other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to the
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. Select another desired menu item, from [1]~[7].
7 If no other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore
the Key Operator Mode Screen.
8 Turn power OFF.
9 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit
code.
12 - 35
12
Key Operator
Mode
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [8] (continued)
Timer Setting [4]
Use the Timer Setting to set the On/Off times in hours and minutes for each day of the
week or set the Block time for the entire week, i.e., the same On/Off time for each day.
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Timer Setting Screen
Block Timer Setting Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [8] Weekly timer. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then touch
OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit
code.
3 Touch [4] Timer setting to display the Timer Setting Screen.
12 - 36
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [8] (continued)
Timer Setting [4] (continued)
4 When the screen is displayed, the hour section of ON-hour of Monday is highlighted.
Input the hour using touch screen keypad, and touch SET. (Setting example: 6 p.m.
is 18.)
Touching SET repeatedly will shift the input section from Monday ON-hour, Monday
ON-minute, Monday OFF-hour, Monday OFF-minute, Tuesday ON-hour e.g.
Input the year using touch screen keypad, and touch OK.
NOTES:
1 If ON-time and OFF-time are the same, power will not go on.
2 If the setting is 00:00~00:00 you will not be able to set the copiers off/on condition for specific
days.
When setting Sunday OFF-minute, Monday ON-hour is highlighted again. Proceed
to step 6.
5 To set the Block ON/OFF time for all days of the week, touch Block timer setting to
display the Block Timer Setting Screen.
6 When the Block Timer Setting Screen is displayed, the On and OFF times are initially
set at 00:00~00:00. Input the hour and minutes using the control panel keypad, and
touch SET after each entry.
7 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 10.
8 If other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. Select another desired menu item, from
[1]~[7].
9 If no other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore
the Key Operator Mode Screen.
10 Turn power OFF.
11 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
Weekly Timer
12
Key Operator
Mode
12 - 37
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [8] (continued)
Timer Action On/Off Setting [5]
Use the Timer action to set the On/Off condition of the copier for a given month. Set the
On-Off condition for specific days; or Block, for all Mondays through Sundays of the given
month. The default setting is Block: On for Mondays through Saturdays, and Off for Sundays.
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen
Block Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen
Timer Action Change Confirmation Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [8] Weekly timer. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then touch
OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit
code.
3 Touch [5] Timer action On/Off setting to display the Timer Action On/Off Setting
Screen.
The days of the current month are displayed, with timer-active days highlighted.
4 To activate the Timer for any day, touch the key for that day.
To change the month, use arrows to scroll to the desired month. Proceed to step 6.
12 - 38
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [8] (continued)
Timer Action On/Off Setting [5] (continued)
5 To Blockly set the on/off data for the entire month by the day of the week, touch
Block setting by day of the week to display the Block Timer Action On/Off Setting
Screen. If you touch an already-highlighted key, no change will occur.
6 Select the Timer ON/OFF action by the day of the week as follows.
To set the Timer action ON, touch the ON key for the desired day.
To set the Timer action OFF, touch the OFF key for the desired day.
7 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN.
NOTE:
If no changes were made in the Block Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen, the Weekly Timer
Setting Menu Screen will be displayed.
8 If changes were made, the Timer Action Change Confirmation Screen will be displayed.
Touch YES to change the timer action, or touch NO to cancel.
The Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen will be displayed.
9 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 12.
10 If other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. Select another desired menu item, from
[1]~[7].
11 If no other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore
the Key Operator Mode Screen.
12 Turn power OFF.
13 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
Weekly Timer
12
Key Operator
Mode
12 - 39
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [8] (continued)
Lunch Hour Off Setting [6]
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [8] Weekly timer. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then touch
OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
3 Touch [6] Lunch hour Off setting to display the Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen.
4 Touch Function Valid to activate Lunch hour off. Set OFF time and Re-start time
using operation panel keypad, and touch SET.
Touch Function Invalid to de-activate Lunch hour off. The OFF time, Re-start time
and SET key will appear gray and will not be selected.
The Function Invalid setting is the factory default setting.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8.
6 If other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. Select another desired menu item, from
[1]~[7].
7 If no other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore
the Key Operator Mode Screen.
8 Turn power OFF.
9 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit
code.
12 - 40
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [8] (continued)
Timer Interrupt Password Setting [7]
Use the Timer Interrupt Password Setting mode to establish a 4-digit password requirement
for using Timer Interrupt. The default password of 0000 allows the timer function to be
interrupted without the requirement for password entry.
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Interrupt Password Setting Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
2 Touch [8] Weekly timer. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then touch
OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
3 Touch [7] Timer interrupt password setting to display the Interrupt Password Setting
Screen.
4 Input a new 4-digit password using touch panel keypad, and touch OK to complete
the setting.
Weekly Timer
NOTE:
When the password setting is 0000, timer interrupt can be used by turning the copier Off, then On.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8.
6 If other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to
the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. Select another desired menu item, from
[1]~[7].
7 If no other Weekly timer settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore
the Key Operator Mode Screen.
8 Turn power OFF.
9 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
12
Key Operator
Mode
NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit
code.
12 - 41
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Memory Switch [9]
This function allows you to change the Memory Settings listed below. Underlined settings
indicate factory settings. See pp. 12-44~12-46 for details on Memory Settings.
SW No.
Item
No.01: Auto reset timer
No.02:
No.03:
No.04:
No.05:
No.06:
No.07:
No.08:
No.09:
No.10:
No.11:
No.12:
No.13:
No.14:
No.15:
No.16:
No.17:
No.18:
No.19:
No.20:
No.21:
No.22:
No.23:
No.24:
No.25:
12 - 42
Setting (default is underlined)
OFF/ 30sec./ 60 sec./ 90 sec./ 120 sec./150
sec./ 180 sec./ 210 sec./ 240 sec./ 270 sec./
300 sec.
Full-Auto/ Initial Setting
Auto reset key function
RADF-Original effect
RADF Selected/ RADF + Auto Reset Key
Selected
Erasure outside area of original Area Outside of Original Erased/ Erased for
APS/AMS only
RADF frame erasure selection
None/ 2mm Frame/ 3mm Frame/ 5mm Frame
Automatic tray switching
OFF/ ON
Platen APS
OFF/ ON
RADF APS
OFF/ ON
ATS/APS switch (Tray 1)
OFF/ ON
ATS/APS switch (Tray 2)
OFF/ ON
ATS/APS switch (Tray 3)
OFF/ ON
ATS/APS switch (Tray 4)
OFF/ ON
ATS/APS switch (Tray 5)
OFF/ ON
APS switch (Bypass)
OFF/ ON
Platen AMS
OFF/ ON
RADF AMS
OFF/ ON
Staple mode reset-function
OFF/ ON
Key click sound
OFF/ ON
Job memory auto recall function OFF/ ON
Tray setting: sheet insertion
Tray 1/ Tray 3/ Bypass
A5, B6 size original type
Landscape/ Portrait
A3, B4, 11x17 size original type Landscape/ Portrait
Rotation
ON/ APS/AMS only/ APS/AMS/reduce only
1 SHOT indication time
3 seconds/ 5 seconds
Power save screen
Shut-off/ Low power
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Memory Switch [9] (continued)
Key Operator Mode Screen
Memory Switch Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 Touch [9] Memory switch. Memory Switch Screen will be displayed.
3 Touch Upper arrow/Lower arrow key to change the setting of the item in upper line
of the message.
Touch Change Setting Contents to change the setting contents in lower line of the
message.
4 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 6.
5 If other key operator setting are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the
Key Operator Mode Screen.
6 Turn power OFF.
7 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
Memory
Switch
12
Key Operator
Mode
NOTE:
If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 43
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Memory Switch [9] (continued)
The following functions can be provided by the Memory switch settings.
[1] Auto reset timer
Set the reset interval starting from the completion of a copying job until the machine
returns to the initial condition.
[2] Auto reset key function
Set the condition of the following modes when Auto Reset is pressed; Copy mode,
Copy density, Magnification, Tray selection.
[3] RADF-original effect
Set the machine condition when original is set on RADF in non-RADF mode with
RADF unit closed.
[4] Erasure outside area of original
Set the machine to delete the outside area of original.
[5] RADF frame erasure selection
Set Frame erasure to function anytime in RADF mode.
[6] Automatic tray switching
When paper is depleted during a copying job, the copier continues copying by switching
to another tray that contains the same size paper. When memory switches 9-13 are set
to OFF, the copier does not switch to the corresponding tray even if ATS is ON.
[7] Platen APS
The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on
the platen glass. (In reduction or enlargement mode, an appropriate paper size is
selected according to the ratio selected.)
When memory switches 9-13 are set to OFF, the corresponding tray is not automatically
selected even if the Platen APS function is ON.
[8] RADF APS
The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on
the RADF. (In reduction/enlargement mode, an appropriate paper size is selected
according to the ratio.)
When memory switches 9-13 are set to OFF, the corresponding tray is not selected
even if the RADF APS function is ON.
[9] ATS/APS switch (Tray 1)
When this function is OFF, the machine will not switch to Tray 1 even if ATS is ON.
Likewise, when this function is OFF, Tray 1 is not automatically selected even if Platen
APS or RADF-APS (Memory Switch 7 or 8) is ON.
[10] ATS/APS switch (Tray 2)
When this function is OFF, the machine will not switch to Tray 2 even if ATS is ON.
Likewise, when this function is OFF, Tray 2 is not automatically selected even if Platen
APS or RADF-APS (Memory Switch 7 or 8) is ON.
12 - 44
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Memory Switch [9] (continued)
[11] ATS/APS switch (Tray 3)
When this function is OFF, the machine will not switch to Tray 3 even if ATS is ON.
Likewise, when this function is OFF, Tray 3 is not automatically selected even if Platen
APS or RADF-APS (Memory Switch 7 or 8) is ON.
[12] ATS/APS switch (Tray 4)
When this function is OFF, the machine will not switch to Tray 4 even if ATS is ON.
Likewise, when this function is OFF, Tray 4 is not automatically selected even if Platen
APS or RADF-APS (Memory Switch 7 or 8) is ON.
[13] ATS/APS switch (Tray 5)
When this function is OFF, the machine will not switch to Tray 5 even if ATS is ON.
Likewise, when this function is OFF, Tray 5 is not automatically selected even if Platen
APS or RADF-APS (Memory Switch 7 or 8) is ON.
[14] APS switch (Bypass)
When this function is OFF, Multi-sheet bypass tray is not automatically selected even
if Platen APS or RADF-APS (Memory Switch 7 or 8) is ON.
[15] Platen AMS
The copier detects the size of the platen original and selects the appropriate magnification
ratio to correspond to the selected paper size.
[16] RADF AMS
After detecting the original size placed on the RADF the copier automatically selects
an appropriate ratio for the copy when copy size is selected manually.
Memory
Switch
[17] Staple mode reset-function
Staple mode is automatically canceled after a job is completed with Staple sort mode
ON. (Sort mode is selected.)
[18] Key click sound
Activate or deactivate the sound each time a key is pressed on the touch panel .
[19] Job memory auto recall function
Job memory No.15 is automatically recalled when power is turned on or when Autoreset is restored.
This job recall function works only when Job No.15 is registered.
[20] Tray setting: sheet insertion
Select the tray to feed covers or sheets to be inserted in Sheet/Cover insertion mode.
[21] A5,B6 size original type
Select the orientation of the A5 or B6 size original.
[22] A3, B4, 11x17 size original type
Select the orientation of the A3, B4 or 11x17 size original.
12 - 45
12
Key Operator
Mode
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Memory Switch [9] (continued)
[23] Rotation
Select to activate, activate only when the APS/AMS functions, or activate the Rotation
only when the APS/AMS/reduce functions.
[24] 1 SHOT indication time
Select the SHOT indication time function.
[25] Power save screen
Select the screen to display when pressing the [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] key.
12 - 46
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Control Panel Adjustment [10]
Use this feature to check the malfunction of the LCD touch screen due to the shift in
position of the touch sensor.
❒ When the Control Panel Adjustment Screen does not display in step 2, press one from
keypad [0] ~ [9].
Key Operator Mode Screen
Control Panel Adjustment Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 Touch [10] Control panel adjustment to display the Control Panel Adjustment Screen.
3 Touch the “+” indication at the upper right and lower left corners on the Control Panel
Adjustment Screen using a fine pointer. The present coordinates will be displayed in
the message area of the screen.
4 Check that the X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first line of the message
area fall within the standard value displayed in the second line.
5 Touch the CHECK BUTTONs at the upper left and lower right corners on the screen
to check if the buzzer tone functions normally.
6 If the coordinates fall out of the range of the standard value in step 4, or the buzzer
tone does not sound in step 5, please contact Konica service centre.
7 Turn power OFF.
Memory
Switch
Control Panel
Adjustment
12
Key Operator
Mode
NOTE:
If an unvalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 47
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Auto Low Power/Auto Shut Off [11]
Select the interval of time that must elapse before Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off
become activated. Or, select the Auto Shut Off function to On or Off.
❒ Setting options: See list below
Key Operator Mode Screen 1
Key Operator Mode Screen 2
Timer Setting Screen
Auto Shut Off ON/OFF Setting Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 To display menus [11] to [13] of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the lower
arrow key.
3 Touch [11] Auto Low Power-Auto Shut off to display the Timer Setting Screen.
NOTE:
If an unvalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
4 The Timer Key is located on the Timer Setting Screen below the Auto Low Power
indicator. Touch the Timer Key to select a specific waiting period before activation of
the Auto Low Power function. The default setting is 15min.
If the Auto Shut off function is not desired, proceed to step 6.
If the “Auto Low Power” indicator light is dim and the Timer Key cannot be selected,
proceed to step 5.
NOTES:
1 The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto Shut Off setting.
2 If the same period of time as Auto Shut Off is selected, the Auto Low Power indicator light will
dim, and Auto Shut Off will function instead of Auto Low Power.
12 - 48
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Auto Low Power/Auto Shut Off [11] (continued)
5 Touch the Timer Key displayed under the “Auto Shut off” indicator on the Timer
Setting Screen, to select the period of time to wait before activating Auto Shut Off.
The default setting is 90min.
NOTE:
If the period of time selected for Auto Shut Off is shorter than the Auto Low Power setting, the
setting for Auto Low Power will be automatically changed to that of the Auto Shut Off setting, and
the Auto Low Power indicator light will dim. In this case, Auto Low Power will not function.
6 Touch Next setting on the Timer Setting Screen to display the Auto Shut Off ON/
OFF Setting Screen.
7 Touch On to activate Auto Shut Off, or touch Off to de-activate it. The default setting
is the On setting.
When Off is selected, Auto Shut Off will not function and the period of time for Auto
Low Power can be selected from 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 90, 120, and 240min.
8 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 10.
9 If other Auto Low Power/Auto Shut Off settings are required, press PREVIOUS
SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode screen.
10 Turn power OFF.
11 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
Auto Low Power/
Auto Shut Off
12
Key Operator
Mode
12 - 49
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Call Remote Service Centre [12]
When activated, the Remote Diagnostics option is automatically monitored by your service
centre. In case of machine trouble, select the Call Remote Service Centre option. Your
service centre will contact you to determine the appropriate means for resolving the problem.
❒ Setting options: Call for JAM concerns; Call for SC concerns; Call for toner bottle supply;
Call for paper supply; Call for image quality; Call for others
Key Operator Mode Screen 1
Key Operator Mode Screen 2
Call Remote Service Centre Screen
Press START Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 To display menus [11] to [13] of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the lower
arrow key.
3 Touch [12] Call remote service centre to display the Call Remote Service Centre
Screen.
4 Touch [1] Call for JAM concerns; [2] Call for SC concerns; [3] Call for toner bottla
supply; [4] Call for paper supply; [5] Call for image quality; or [6] Call for others.
The Press START Screen will be displayed.
NOTE:
If an unvalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
5 Touch START to complete the setting.
6 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8.
7 If other key operator settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the
Key Operator Mode Screen.
8 Turn power OFF.
9 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
12 - 50
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Save EKC Data to Memory Card [13]
The copier with the memory card mounted can store the EKC data entered in the copier
to the memory card.
❒ Setting options: YES, NO
Key Operator Mode Screen 1
Key Operator Mode Screen 2
Save EKC Data Screen
Procedure
1 While pressing [HELP], turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then
touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen. (See note.)
2 To display menus [11] to [13] of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the lower
arrow key.
3 Touch [13] Save EKC data to memory card to display the Save EKC Data Screen.
4 Touch YES to store the EKC data to the memory card, or touch NO if not desired.
5 If no further changes are required, proceed to step 7.
6 If other key operator settings are required, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the
Key Operator Mode Screen.
7 Turn power OFF.
8 Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.
NOTE:
If an unvalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
12 - 51
Call Remote
Service Centre
Save EKC
Data
12
Key Operator
Mode
Section 12 : Key Operator Mode
Key Operator Mode
Key Operator EKC Form
ACCT No.
12 - 52
PASSWORD
COUNT/LIMIT
Section 13: Maintenance & Supplies
Loading Paper
Add Paper Indicator
Paper Level Indicator (Tray 5)
Using the HELP Key
Tray Error Indicator (!)
Loading Paper in Tray 1
Loading Paper in Tray 2
Loading Paper in Tray 3
Loading Paper in Tray 4
Loading Paper in Tray 5
Adding Toner
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-106 Finisher
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-108BM Finisher
Preventive Maintenance
Reading the PM Count and Total Count
Cleaning the Left Partition Glass
Cleaning the Document Glass and Cover
Loading Paper
Adding Toner
Inserting New
Staple Cartridge
Preventive
Maintenance
Cleaning Left
Partition Glass
Cleaning
Document
Glass & Cover
13
Maintenance
& Supplies
Section 13 : Maintenance & Supplies
Loading Paper
Add Paper Indicator (
)
The Add paper indicator light goes on when a tray is empty and flashes when the key for
that tray is touched. Add paper to a tray when the Add paper indicator light is on or
flashing.
Paper Level Indicator (Tray 5)
Paper level is indicated on the outside of Tray 5 to enable you to see when paper is low.
When a paper tray is empty, a message prompts you to load paper.
Do not exceed the following tray limits:
Tray 1:
500 sheets 80g/m2
Tray 2:
500 sheets 80g/m2
Tray 3:
1,000 sheets 80g/m2
Tray 4:
1,500 sheets 80g/m2
Tray 5:
3,500 sheets 80g/m2
Multi-sheet bypass tray: 100 sheets 80g/m2
(Do not load above the red line on rear guide.)
Using the HELP Key
To learn how to load paper at any time, press [HELP], then touch any tray to display
instructions on the touch screen. For details on tray position size vs. paper size, see
Section 4: Paper Information.
Tray Error Indicator ( ! )
If a paper tray is overloaded, or if the tray is loaded with a paper size that does not conform
to the tray position size, the tray error message displays. In this case you must touch
PAPER SIZE. The tray in error will be highlighted.
Before loading
paper, fan the stack
to prevent sheets
from sticking
together.
When placing a stack
of paper in to the tray,
be sure to load it with
the curl turning up, i.e.,
with concave side up.
See the following pages for instructions on loading paper in trays 1~5.
13 - 2
Section 13 : Maintenance & Supplies
Loading Paper (continued)
Loading Paper in Tray 1
Procedure
1 Withdraw tray 1, and place paper on the tray with the curl side turning up.
Load size A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5* or B6*
Do not stack paper above the tray hook level.
2 Move the green levers, located at the front and the left side, to the edge of the paper.
3 When paper is seated properly, push the tray back fully into the copier.
NOTE:
*: A5 or B6 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
Loading paper in Tray 2
Loading Paper
Procedure
1 Withdraw tray 2, and place paper on the tray with the curl side turning up.
Paper size is fixed to size: A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 11"x17", 8.5"x14",
8.5"x11"R or 8.5"x11".
Do not stack paper above the tray hook level.
2 When paper is seated properly, push the tray back fully into the copier.
NOTE:
*: A5 paper is available in landscape orientation (
) only.
13 - 3
13
Maintenance
& Supplies
Section 13 : Maintenance & Supplies
Loading Paper (continued)
Loading Paper in Tray 3
Procedure
1 Withdraw tray 3.
2 Insert paper into the tray with the paper curl turning upward.
Paper size is fixed to size: A4, B5 or 8.5"x11".
Do not load paper above the red line.
3 When paper is seated properly, push the tray back fully into the copier.
Loading paper in Tray 4
Procedure
1 Withdraw tray 4.
2 Insert A4 or A4R paper into the tray with the paper curl turning upward.
Paper size is fixed to size: A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R or 8.5"x11".
Do not load paper above the red line.
3 When paper is seated properly, push the tray back fully into the copier.
13 - 4
Section 13 : Maintenance & Supplies
Loading Paper (continued)
Loading Paper in Tray 5
Procedure
1 Open the LCT upper door.
2 Press the paper loading button to lower the bottom plate of the LCT.
3 Load the fixed size paper into the LCT with the paper curl turning downward.
Paper size is fixed to size: A4 or 8.5"x11".
4 Repeat the steps 2 and 3 until the bottom plate cannot go down any more.
5 Close the LCT upper door.
Loading Paper
13
Maintenance
& Supplies
13 - 5
Section 13 : Maintenance & Supplies
Adding Toner
CAUTION
Keep the toner cartridge away from children. The toner is nontoxic; however if you inhale
or contact with eyes by accident, flush with water and seek medical advice.
• When toner supply is low, “Please add toner” message displays on the touch screen.
• Before adding toner, read directions on the toner cartridge label.
Procedure
1 Tap both top and bottom of the new toner cartridge on solid surface, without removing
the flexible outer cap.
2 Shake the cartridge several times to loosen toner.
3 Remove the flexible outer cap if it is still present.
4 Open the copier front door. Pull the toner unit 90° to the
right.
5 Invert the toner cartridge over the unit with the label
lettering toward you.
6 Insert rear, then front, until the cartridge is fully seated
over the toner hopper.
13 - 6
Section 13 : Maintenance & Supplies
Adding Toner (continued)
7 Slide the lever back and forth a few times while alternating
with Step 8.
8 Tap the cartridge firmly several times, alternating with
Step 7, until toner is completely poured from the cartridge.
9 Slide the lever back and remove the empty toner cartridge. Return the toner unit to
its original position then close the copier front door securely.
Adding Toner
13
Maintenance
& Supplies
13 - 7
Section 13 : Maintenance & Supplies
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-106 Finisher
When the staple cartridge of the finisher is empty, “Please open finisher door Replace
staples” message displays on the touch screen. Follow the procedure below to remove
the empty cartridge from the finisher cartridge housing and set the new cartridge .
Use only the staples supplied by Konica. Contact your service centre to reorder.
Procedure
1 Open the Finisher door.
2 Push down the cartridge housing release lever, then remove the cartridge housing.
3 Remove the empty cartridge from the cartridge housing.
4 Insert the new cartridge into the housing.
13 - 8
Section 13 : Maintenance & Supplies
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-106 Finisher (continued)
5 Remove cardboard stopper.
6 Insert the cartridge housing into the stapler unit, pressing down to secure it in place.
Inserting New
Staple Cartridge
13
Maintenance
& Supplies
13 - 9
Section 13 : Maintenance & Supplies
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-108BM Finisher
When the staple cartridge of the finisher is empty, “Please open finisher door Replace
staples” message displays on the touch screen. Follow the procedure below to remove
the empty cartridge from the finisher cartridge housing and set the new cartridge .
Use only the staples supplied by Konica. Contact your service centre to reorder.
Procedure
1 Open the Finisher door.
2 Pull out the stacker unit by holding the stacker unit handle.
3 Pull up the cartridge housing,
then remove it while sliding
it along the stapler rail.
4 Remove the empty cartridge from the cartridge housing.
13 - 10
Section 13 : Maintenance & Supplies
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-108BM Finisher
(continued)
5 Insert the new cartridge into
the housing.
NOTE:
Do not remove the remaining
staples inside the housing;
otherwise, a blank will be stapled
after the replenishment.
6 Insert the cartridge housing
while sliding it along the
stapler rail, then push in and
down to secure it in place.
7 Return the stacker unit to its original position using.
Inserting New
Staple Cartridge
8 Close the Finisher door.
13
Maintenance
& Supplies
13 - 11
Section 13 : Maintenance & Supplies
Preventive Maintenance
After a set number of copies have been made on your copier, Preventive Maintenance
(PM) will be required for maintaining optimal performance.
When preventive maintenance is due, a message will prompt you to contact your service
centre for maintenance.
Reading the PM Count and Total Count
To display the total number of copies since the last PM, simply press [P] and [2]
simultaneously on the keypad, and read the PM count displayed in the message area.
The first line displays the count of copies to date toward the PM count, plus the total PM
count. The second line displays the date of the last PM.
(Example)
PM : 12345/ 150000
Start date : 7/ 2/ 00
13 - 12
Section 13 : Maintenance & Supplies
Cleaning the Left Partition Glass
The glass partition at the far left of the platen glass is designed for real-time scanning from
the RADF. Keep this glass clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark
lines on the copies.
Raise the document cover, and
clean the left partition glass with
a clean soft cloth.
Cleaning the Document Glass and Cover
The platen glass and the inner surface of the document feeder should be kept clean.
Otherwise, soil marks may be copied.
Raise the document cover, and clean the
glass and inner surface of the document
cover with a clean soft cloth.
Preventive
Maintenance
Cleaning Left
Partition Glass
Cleaning
Document
Glass & Cover
13
Maintenance
& Supplies
NOTES:
1. The glass may also be cleaned with a soft cloth dampened slightly with water; or with an
antistatic cleaner recommended by your service centre.
2. Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean any portion of the copier.
13 - 13
Section 14: Troubleshooting
Call for Service
Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble
Memory Overflow
Copy Conditions Using Memory
Action 1
Action 2
Power OFF/ON Screen
Clearing Mishandled Paper
Copying Hints
Call for
Service
Memory
Overflow
Power OFF/ON
Screen
Cleaning
Mishandled
Paper
Copying Hints
14
Troubleshooting
Section 14 : Troubleshooting
Call for Service
CAUTION
A Call for Service message indicates a machine condition that requires the attention of
your Konica service centre.
Call for Service Screen
Procedure
1 Immediately make note of the Report code No. indicated
in the upper portion of the screen.
2 Turn OFF the main power switch.
3 Unplug the machine.
4 Contact your Konica service centre and report the condition
and code No.
14 - 2
Section 14 : Troubleshooting
Call for Service (continued)
Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble
If the message shown below is displayed on the Call for Service Screen, you may continue
operating the copier on a limited function basis and utilize the trays and ADU that are not
affected by the trouble. To obtain this limited functionality of the copier, consult your Konica
service centre. Be sure to utilize the limited function only temporarily, and arrange for
machine repair immediately.
Procedure
1 If the limited use of the copier is available, not the Report code but the following message
is displayed in the message area.
Tray 1 failure
Press AUTO to select except this tray
2 Press [AUTO RESET].
Please switch ON/OFF
E 18-2
3 Turn OFF then ON the power switch.
Copying job can be continued without using the portion in trouble (ex. Tray 1).
CAUTION
EVEN IF THE COPYING JOB CAN BE CONTINUED WITH THE ABOVE OPERATION,
IMMEDIATELY CONTACT YOUR KONICA SERVICE CENTRE WHEN THE CALL FOR
SERVICE SCREEN IS DISPLAYED.
Call for
Service
14
Troubleshooting
14 - 3
Section 14 : Troubleshooting
Memory Overflow
In certain copy modes, the 7065 uses memory to make operations convenient and smooth
flowing. Occasional memory overflow may occur if the installed memory is inadequate for
the copy conditions selected. Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended
that you contact your Konica service centre to extend the memory capacity in your machine.
Memory overflow messages are displayed as follows:
Memory full - Check output and
reload original
Memory full - Start → START key
Cancel → ST/CL key
(Alternately displayed)
To handle the Memory overflow condition while in a job, take the appropriate action indicated
below for each copy mode. These actions enable you to continue the job or suspend the
job.
Procedures for Action 1 and Action 2 are on p. 14-5 and p. 14-6, respectively.
Copy Conditions Using Memory
The following is a list of copy modes supported by memory, along with the appropriate
type action to be taken for each mode in the event Memory overflow occurs. Procedures
for Action 1 and Action 2 are on p. 14-5 and 14-6, respectively.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
14 - 4
1s2 Copying mode
2s2 Copying mode
1s2 Copying Using platen glass
Shift/Shift w/Reduce copying (1s2, 2s2)
Shift/Shift w/Reduce copying (1s1, 2s1)
Sheet/Cover Insertion copying (1s2, 2s2)
Sheet/Cover Insertion copying (1s1, 2s1)
Image Insertion copying (using RADF)
Image Insertion copying (using platen glass)
Chapter
Combination
Image Insert
Book Copy
Booklet
Platen Memory copying
Proof Copy (1s2, 2s2)
Proof Copy (1s1, 2s1)
Action 2
Action 2
Action 2
Action 2
Action 1
Action 2
Action 1
Action 2
Action 2
Action 2
Action 2
Action 2
Action 2
Action 2
Action 2
Action 2
Action 1
Section 14 : Troubleshooting
Memory Overflow (continued)
Action 1
Action 1 is required when a job prematurely stops after the machine produces one copied
set, and the Memory overflow messages display alternately. Action 1 enables you to
continue the job (see procedure below) or suspend the job (see procedure at the bottom
of the page). Check the discharged copied set to see if the acquired scanned data is
sufficient for you to continue the job in the print quantity remaining.
To continue the job:
1 Press [START PRINT] to allow the machine to prepare the scanned data for job
completion in the amount remaining in the print quantity setting. When preparation of
the scanned data satisfies the print quantity setting, the machine will stop, and scanned
data will be erased.
(If the Staple mode had been selected for the job, it will be changed to Sort mode,
automatically.)
The following messages display, alternately:
Memory full - Check output and
reload original
Memory full - Start → START key
Cancel → ST/CL key
(Alternately displayed)
2 Check pages of the discharged set to confirm the amount of missing data, before
completing the job.
3 Press [START PRINT] to complete the job according to the print quantity remaining.
To suspend the job:
1 Press [STOP/CLEAR] to save the job settings.
Or, press [AUTO RESET] to clear the job and resume initial settings.
All scanned data will be erased.
Memory
Overflow
14
Troubleshooting
14 - 5
Section 14 : Troubleshooting
Memory Overflow (continued)
Action 2
Action 2 is required when a job ceases with no copies produced, and Memory overflow
messages display alternately. Action 2 enables you to continue the job (see procedure
below) or suspend the job (see procedure at the bottom of the page).
To continue the job:
1 Press [START PRINT] to allow the machine to prepare the scanned data for job
completion in the amount remaining in the print quantity setting. When preparation of
the scanned data satisfies the print quantity setting, the machine will stop, and scanned
data will be erased.
The following messages display, alternately:
Memory full - Check output and
reload original
Memory full - Start → START key
Cancel → ST/CL key
(Alternately displayed)
2 Check pages of the discharged set to confirm the amount of missing data, before
completing the job.
3 Press [START PRINT] to complete the job according to the print quantity remaining.
To suspend the job:
1 Press [STOP/CLEAR] to save the job settings.
Or, press [AUTO RESET] to clear the job and resume initial settings.
All scanned data will be erased.
14 - 6
Section 14 : Troubleshooting
Power OFF/ON Screen
When any trouble affects the electric signal of the copier, the Power OFF/ON Screen will
be displayed.
Turn OFF then ON the power switch.
Power OFF/ON Screen
Memory
Overflow
Power OFF/ON
Screen
14
Troubleshooting
14 - 7
Section 14 : Troubleshooting
Clearing Mishandled Paper
CAUTION
When removing mishandled paper, be sure to leave no torn paper inside the machine,
avoid touching the drum or scratching it in any way, and keep all metal and magnetic
objects, e.g., watches, jewelry, etc. away from the drum area.
When a paper misfeed occurs, the copier stops making copies and mishandled paper
codes display on the screen to indicate misfeed area(s). A flashing code indicates the
area that should be cleared first. To view Help screen instructions, touch GUIDE when the
flashing mishandled paper code displays. Be sure to remove paper from each flashing
location until all locations are cleared. See procedures on the following pages.
The following 15 mishandled paper codes display for specific areas of the machine.
Code
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
14 - 8
Location
: Tray 1
: Tray 2
: Tray 3
: Tray 3 or Tray 4
: Multi-sheet bypass tray
: Upper right side cover
: Lower right side cover
: Multi-sheet bypass tray and
Main body
: Upper right side cover and
Main body
: Main body
: Main body
: ADU, or Main body and Sorter
: ADU or Lower right side cover
: Sorter
: RADF
: Tray 5 (LCT)
Section 14 : Troubleshooting
Clearing Mishandled Paper (continued)
CAUTION:
The fixing unit is internally very hot. To avoid getting burned DO NOT TOUCH the area.
Use care when withdrawing the fixing unit.
CAUTION:
The paper exit unit of the main body (outlet of fixing unit) is very hot. To avoid getting
burned DO NOT TOUCH the area.
CAUTION:
Use care after opening the duplex tray. Keep fingers away from the closing area.
CAUTION:
The drum unit generates high voltage. To avoid bodily electrical shock NEVER TOUCH
the area.
CAUTION:
The roller drive unit is located inside the Booklet tray of the finisher. DO NOT put your hand
into the roller drive unit when removing folded or stapled & folded sheet; otherwise, you
may be injured.
Cleaning
Mishandled
Paper
14
Troubleshooting
14 - 9
Section 14 : Troubleshooting
Copying Hints
COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER SWITCH IS ON
Fully insert paper trays.
Close RADF.
Check to be sure power plug is firmly inserted in electrical socket.
COPY IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT
Manually adjust copy density to darker density.
Check toner indicator and add toner, if required.
Check paper for dampness. Do not leave paper in copier when humidity is high.
Check to see if Photo, Text, or Increase Contrast mode is required.
Check the Density shift.
COPY IMAGE IS TOO DARK
Manually adjust copy density to lighter density.
Check to see if Photo, Text, or Increase Contrast mode is required.
Check the Density shift.
COPY IMAGE IS NOT CLEAN OR SHOWS SPOTS
Use clean originals since dirt marks may be copied.
Keep platen glass and inner surface of document cover clean.
Call for service if “Call for service” is displayed in the message area.
Check density indicator and lighten if required.
COPY PAPER MISHANDLES DURING COPYING
Fan copy paper and load it with curl side in proper location. Do not exceed the tray capacity.
COPY IMAGE CAN BE RUBBED OFF
Check copy paper thickness. Use Thick paper mode, if paper weight requires it.
MAGNIFICATION CANNOT BE CHANGED
Image Shift and Reduce & Shift are incompatible with magnification.
Press [AUTO RESET] and set desired copying conditions without using Image Shift or
Reduce & Shift.
THE TOUCH SCREEN PAPER SIZE INDICATOR DISPLAYS [!] ON THE TRAY
The [!] symbol indicates that the paper loaded in the tray is inconsistent with the tray
position setting.
DUPLEX MODES CANNOT BE SELECTED
Fully close ADU and RADF, then select Duplex mode again.
COPYING DOES NOT BEGIN AFTER PRESSING START PRINT
Insert or adjust the appropriate paper tray for paper size selected.
Close document cover firmly.
Close front door completely.
COPYING DOES NOT RESUME AFTER MISHANDLED PAPER IS REMOVED
Check copier diagram on touch screen for additional indications of mishandled paper.
14 - 10
Section 14 : Troubleshooting
Copying Hints (continued)
COPY QUALITY IS POOR
Check paper for dampness, and replace if necessary.
THE ORIGINAL PAPER IS MISHANDLED OR SKEWED IN THE DOCUMENT FEEDER
Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight.
Be sure originals are not stapled.
Align originals evenly in the RADF.
Check to make sure paper guides meet the width of mixed size originals.
COPY IMAGE IS SKEWED WHEN BYPASS IS USED
Be sure copy paper is inserted straight.
USING ECM, COPIES CANNOT BE MADE AFTER PASSWORD IS ENTERED
Check to see if the message EXCEEDS LIMIT is displayed.
Contact key operator to reset limit.
FINISHER DOES NOT OPERATE
Press Output mode key.
Remove paper misfeed, in any. Properly close finisher door.
RADF INDICATOR WILL NOT LIGHT AFTER AUTO/RESET IS PRESSED
Fully close RADF.
RADF LIGHT IS FLASHING
The document feeder is ready to accept originals.
Insert originals on RADF tray, press [AUTO RESET], then [START PRINT].
ADD TONER MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
New toner supply is needed. Follow instructions for adding toner.
CALL FOR PM IS DISPLAYED IN MESSAGE AREA
Contact your service centre for Preventive Maintenance.
APS SELECTS THE WRONG PAPER SIZE
Paper guides must be adjusted exactly to the size of originals.
IN MIXED ORIGINAL MODE, A MESSAGE TO LOAD A REQUIRED PAPER SIZE
DISPLAYS, EVEN THOUGH THAT SIZE IS LOADED IN ONE OF THE TRAYS
Paper sizes loaded in the trays must be consistent with the tray position size; otherwise,
the [!] symbol will be displayed on the Paper Size indicator of the Paper Tray Selection
Screen.
THE BASIC SCREEN DOES NOT DISPLAY SETTINGS AS DESCRIBED IN USER’S
MANUAL
Check with the key operator, as Initial Settings may have been changed.
Copying Hints
14
Troubleshooting
14 - 11
Section 14 : Troubleshooting
Copying Hints (continued)
PLEASE CHECK ORIGINAL
This message displays when the copier detects a non-standard paper size on the platen
glass.
Select paper size and press [START PRINT]. 1.00 magnification will be selected
automatically.
If this message continues to display after selecting paper size, select 1.00 magnification,
even if it is already indicated, then press [START PRINT]. If desired, ask your Konica
service centre to enable the machine to default to 1.00 magnification in this situation.
SHEET INSERTION RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED
Blank insertion: Be sure manuscript originals do not already include blank sheets in the
locations designated for sheet insertion.
Copy insertion: To ensure that chapter sheets in 1-2 mode always appear on the right
hand side in the finished set, insertion sheets must be designated on the page setting
screen with odd numbers, not even. If required, make an even numbered original page
odd by inserting a blank sheet in front of that page, so that the blank sheet is even and the
insertion sheet is odd.
FINISHER STAPLE RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED
The 2 staple position functions only on copy paper that is loaded vertically (portrait style).
14 - 12
Section 15: Machine Specifications
Main Body Specifications
Main Body
RADF (DF-312)
Option Specifications
FS-106 In-Bin Stapler Finisher
FS-108BM In-Bin Stapler Finisher
Cover Sheet Feeder (PI-108)
Large Capacity Tray (LT-352)
Memory Unit
Key Counter
Tandem Kit 7065
Copy Materials
Maintenance Kit (150,000 copies) (except for the United Kingdom)
15
Machine
Specifications
Section 15 : Machine Specifications
Main Body Specifications
Main Body
Name:
Type:
Transfer method:
Platen glass:
Light-sensitive unit:
Light source:
Developing method:
Fixing method:
Density adjustment:
Magnification ratio:
Konica 7065
Console type
Indirect electrostatic method
Fixed
OPC
Xenon lamp
Dry, 2-component magnetic brush developing
Heat roller
Automatic and manual (9 steps)
1:1±1.0%
Enlargement: 1:1.150 (115%), 1:1.220 (122%), 1:1.410 (141%)
Reduction: 1:0.860 (86%), 1:0.820 (82%), 1:0.710 (71%)
Zoom/Special ratio magnification ratio: 33% to 400% (in 1%
increments)
Copy paper:
Plain paper: 60 to 90g/m2
Special papers: 50 to 59g/m2, 91 to 170g/m2 (with the Multi-sheet
bypass tray)
Copying speed:
65 copies/min. (A4), 48 copies/min. (A4R), 34 copies/min. (A3),
65 copies/min. (B5), 40 copies/min. (B4), 55 copies/min. (B5R)
Continuous copying: 1 to 9,999 copies
Types of original:
Sheet, book originals
Original size:
A3 maximum
Copy size:
A3 to A5R size (image cutoff width: leading and trailing ends
4.5mm±1.5mm, top and bottom 1.5mm±1.5mm)
Paper supply method: Tray 1 (Universal); 500 sheets
Tray 2; 500 sheets
Tray 3; 1,000 sheets
Tray 4; 1,500 sheets
Tray 5; 3,500 sheets (LT-352 option)
Multi-sheet bypass tray; 100 sheets
Warm-up time:
Approximately 6.5 minutes
First copy time:
3.9 seconds (A4)
Power:
AC 230V 50Hz (This equipment selects the correct voltage
automatically.)
Power consumption: 2.3kW max. (with option)
Sound power level: 78dB max. (without option)
Weight:
Approx. 231kg (main body + RADF)
Size:
756(W) x 710(D) x 1164(H) mm (main body + RADF)
1897(W) x 710(D) x 1164(H) mm (main body + RADF+ FS-106
Finisher+ LCT)
1977(W) x 710(D) x 1164(H) mm (main body + RADF+ FS-108BM
Finisher+ LCT)
Effective size:
1606(W) x 710(D) mm (main body + RADF)
2107(W) x 710(D) mm (main body + RADF+ FS-106 Finisher+ LCT)
2187(W) x 710(D) mm (main body + RADF+ FS-108BM Finisher+ LCT)
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
15 - 2
Section 15 : Machine Specifications
Main Body Specifications (continued)
RADF (DF-312)
Function:
Type of original:
Original size:
Original capacity:
Original insertion:
Power source:
Feeds 1- and 2-sided originals automatically
Plain paper (50 to 130g/m2)
A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 8.5"x11"
50 sheets max.
Automatic feed at a time
Supply from main body
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
15 - 3
15
Machine
Specifications
Section 15 : Machine Specifications
Option Specifications
FS-106 In-Bin Stapler Finisher
Type:
Sorting system:
Types of paper:
Offset catch tray
Sorting by shifting (30±2 mm) (copies are delivered face down)
A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5 (60 to 90g/m2 paper)
Primary (Main) tray in non-sort mode or Secondary (Sub) tray;
50 to 170g/m2 paper
Number of stapled sheet: 50 sheets max. or 5 mm or less (80g/m2 paper)
Staple cartridge:
5,000 staples x 2
Dimensions:
460(W) x 616(D) x 980(H) mm
Weight:
50kg
Power source:
Supply from main body
FS-108BM In-Bin Stapler Finisher
Type:
Sorting system:
Types of paper:
Offset catch tray
Sorting by shifting (30±2 mm) (copies are delivered face down)
A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, B6, 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11",
8.5"x11"R (60 to 90g/m2 paper)
Secondary (Sub) tray is also available for exiting OHP film or
thin/thick paper.
Number of stapled sheet: 50 sheets max. or 5 mm or less (80g/m2 paper)
Staple cartridge:
5,000 staples x 2
Dimensions:
544(W) x 656(D) x 1095(H) mm
Weight:
80kg
Power source:
Supply from main body
Cover Sheet Feeder (PI-108)
Function:
Types of paper:
Paper sizes:
Paper feed into Finisher FS-108BM
Normal : 60 to 90g/m2 paper
Special : OHP film, thin/thick paper (50 to 59g/m2, 91 to 200g/m2)
A3, B4, F4, A4R, A4, B5, A5*, 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R
*: A5 paper is available in portrait ( ) orientation.
Stack capacity:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Power source:
200 sheets max. or 40 mm or less (200g/m2)
330(W) x 456(D) x 120(H) mm
Approx. 5kg
Supply from FS-108BM
Large Capacity Tray (LT-352)
Function:
Types of paper:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Power source:
Paper feed into main body
A4 (60 to 90g/m2 paper)
366(W) x 552.5(D) x 644.5(H) mm
26kg
Supply from main body
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
15 - 4
Section 15 : Machine Specifications
Option Specifications (continued)
Memory unit
Key Counter
When the copier is used by several departments, this counter can effectively control the
copy volume for each department.
Tamdem Kit 7065
15 - 5
15
Machine
Specifications
Section 15 : Machine Specifications
Copy Materials
Maintenance Kit (150,000 copies) (except for the United Kingdom)
Developer
Cleaning blade
Collection roller ass’y
Cleaner idler gear
Fixing cleaning roller
Fixing roller (D)
Pad ass’y
Filter (K)
Dustproof filter ass’y
Charging cleaning block/A ass’y
Charging cleaning block/B ass’y
Charging control plate
Charging wire
Discharge wire
Transfer cleaning block ass’y (Upper)
Separation cleaning block ass’y (Upper)
Cleaning pad (10pcs)
Polyethylene gloves
Dust bag (rubber band)
Deve. collection sheet (rubber band)
Hand case for collection
Cotton swab (4pcs)
15 - 6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
Index
Index
Index
SYMBOL
[ ! ] symbol 14-10
NUMBER
2 in 1 key 9-12
4 in 1 key 9-12
8 in 1 key 9-12
A
Add Paper Indicator 13-2
ADD PAPER key 6-23
ADU 3-3
Alternate Exit 6-30
APPLICATION key 3-5
APS key 6-19
AUTO Layout 9-43
Auto Low Power 5-2
Automatic Exposure (AE) 6-8
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS) 6-14
Automatic Paper Selection (APS) 6-13
Automatic Tray Switching (ATS) 3-8
AUTO RESET key 3-5
Auto reset key function 12-44
Auto/Reset Mode 3-8
Auto reset timer 12-44
Auto Shut-Off 5-4
B
BACK BLANK key 9-7
BACK COPY key 9-7
Back Cover Mode 9-4
Basic Screen 6-2
BLANK INSERTION key 9-7
Blank sheet interleaving 9-20
Booklet 9-15
Booklet mode outlet 3-4
Booklet tray 3-4
Bypass key 6-44
C
Call for Service 14-2
Call Remote Service Centre 12-50
CAUTION 2-4
Caution Labels 2-2
Chapter 9-9
CHECK key 3-5
Check Mode 6-36
CLEAR QTY. key 3-5
Combination 9-12
Control Panel Adjustment 12-47
ii
Control panel contrast key 6-42
COPY DENSITY key 6-8
Copying Hints 14-10
COPY INSERTION key 9-7
COPY MODE key 6-6
Copy sheet interleaving 9-20
Cover Sheet Feeder 7-16
COVER SHEET key 7-17
COVER WITH BLANK SHEET key 9-16
COVER WITH COPY SHEET key 9-16
D
DANGER 2-4
Data Printing Mode 12-25
Date & Time Setting 12-35
Density Shift 6-11
Direct Selection Screen 3-7
Document cover 13-13
Drum unit 3-3
Dual Page 9-27
E
Earth wire 2-6
EKC (Electronic Key Counter) 12-16
EKC master key code 12-17
EKC password 5-5
Erasure outside area of original 12-44
F
FACE DOWN key 7-13
FACE UP key 7-13
Facing Pages mode 9-27
Finisher Paper Capacity 2-11, 2-12
Fixing unit 3-3
Folder keys 6-2
Folding mode 7-14
FOR ASSISTANCE key 6-42
Frame/Fold Erasure 9-40
Front/Back + Facing Pages mode 9-27
FRONT BLANK key 9-6
FRONT COPY key 9-6
Front Cover + Facing Pages mode 9-27
Front Cover Mode 9-4
FS-106 Finisher 7-2
FS-108BM Finisher 7-3
Full-Automatic Mode Screen 6-2
G
GROUP key 7-13
GUIDE key 14-8
Index
Index
H
HELP key 6-42
HELP MENU key 6-42
Help Mode 6-42
High Mode 8-3
HIGH QUALITY 8-3
I
Image Insert 9-23
Image Shift 9-48
Increase Contrast Mode 8-7
Initial Setting Mode 12-6
Initial Settings 3-8
Insertion Mode 9-4
Installation Space 2-8
INTERRUPT key 6-40
Interrupt Mode 6-40
J
JAM key 6-22
JOB CHECK key 10-5
JOB MEMORY key 10-2
Job Recall 10-4
Job Store 10-2
K
Key counter 3-3
Key Operator Mode 12-2
Key Operator Password 12-2
Keypad 3-5
L
Landscape type original 9-13
Large capacity tray (LT-352) 3-4
Layer Selection Screen 3-7
LCD touch screen 3-5
LCT door 3-3
Lead Edge Delete 3-9
Left partition glass 13-13
LENS MODE key 6-15
Lens Mode Ratio 12-15
Lock icon 10-3
Lunch Hour Off Setting 12-40
M
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
Low Power 5-3
Shut-Off 5-4
stapling control panel 3-4
Stapling 7-18
MEMORY key 6-26
Memory Copy 6-26
Memory Overflow 14-4
Memory Switch 12-42
Mixed Original 8-10
MODE indicator 3-5
MODE key 3-5
Multi-sheet bypass tray 6-43
N
NO COVER SHEET key 9-16
NON COMPLETE JOB LIST key 6-24
Non-Image Area Erase 9-32
Non-sort mode 7-5
Non STD size mode 8-15
O
Oblique erase mode 9-32
OHP Interleave 9-20
OUTPUT key 3-5
Overlay 9-51
P
PAPER key 6-42
Paper level indicator 3-3
PAPER SIZE key 6-19
Paper Type 12-28
Photo Mode 8-7
[P] key 3-5
Platen AMS 12-45
Platen APS 12-44
Platen glass 4-2
Platen Memory Copy 6-26
Plug Socket 2-5
PM count 13-12
Portrait type original 9-13
Power OFF/ON Screen 14-7
Power Saver Mode 5-2
POWER SAVER ON/OFF key 3-5
Power Source 2-5
Power switch 3-3
Preset ratio 6-15
Preventive Maintenance (PM) 13-12
PREVIOUS JOB LIST key 6-24
Primary (main) tray 3-4
PRINT QUANTITY indicator 3-5
Program Job 9-30
Proof Copy 6-36
PROOF COPY key 6-36
iii
Index
Index
R
RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) 3-3
RADF AMS 12-45
RADF APS 12-44
RADF frame erasure selection 12-44
RADF key 6-42
RADF Memory Copy 6-28
RECALL [0] key 3-5
Rectangular erase mode 9-32
Reduce & Shift 9-48
Repeat Image 9-37
RESERVE key 6-21
Resolution 8-3
Reverse Image 9-35
Rotation 6-33
ROTATION OFF key 3-5
S
Secondary (sub) tray 3-4
Service call icon 6-42
Service Settings 3-9
SETTING key 6-21
Sheet/Cover Insertion 9-3
SORT key 3-5
SPECIAL ORIGINAL key 8-2
Staple cartridge 13-8, 13-10
STAPLE key 6-42
Staple Mode Selection button 7-19
Staple position icon 7-7
STAPLE SORT key 3-5
Staple Start/Stop button 7-19
Stapling & Folding mode 7-14
STATUS key 6-24
STOP/CLEAR key 3-5
STORE key 3-5
SUB TRAY key 7-13
Summer Time Setting 12-34
T
Text Mode 8-7
Thin/Thick Paper 9-46
TIMER indicator 3-5
Timer Interrupt 5-6
Timer Interrupt Password Setting 12-41
Timer Setting 12-36
Toner box 3-3
Toner cartridge 13-6
TONER key 6-42
Total counter 3-3
Total PM count 13-12
Touch screen 3-6
Tray Error Indicator ( ! ) 13-2
iv
U
Upper right side cover 3-3
USER NAME CHECK key 6-24
USERSET 1 6-9
USERSET 2 6-9
Userset Density 6-9
Userset ratios 6-15
V
Verti./Horiz. Zoom 6-17
Very High Mode 8-5
W
WARNING 2-4
Weekly Timer 12-31
Weekly Timer Function 5-6
Weekly timer key 6-42
Weekly Timer Master Key Code 3-9
WHOLE AREA key 8-15
Work table 3-3
Z
Z-Folded Original 8-13
ZOOM key 6-16
Zoom Mode 6-16
MEMO
MEMO
Recycled paper is used for the inside pages of this manual.
MANUFACTURER
•
•
KONICA CORPORATION
TOKYO JAPAN
Printed in Japan
2000. 04 v